MLW 2-1-2 The Rifle Platoon 1986 Full Obsolete 0 PDF

TE 7610-66-125-4288
Notified in DI (ADMIN) 20 series for 1986
L E
SO
OB
AUSTRALIAN ARMY
MANUAL OF LAND WARFARE
OBSOLETE
PART TWO
INFANTRY TRAINING
VOLUME 1 PAMPHLET No 2
THE RIFLE PLATOON
1986
i
AUSTRALIAN ARMY
MANUAL OF LAND WARFARE
PART TWO
INFANTRY TRAINING
VOLUME 1
INFANTRY IN OPERATIONS
PAMPHLET NO 2
THE RIFLE PLATOON
OBSOLETE
1986
Headquarters Training Command

4 July 1986
Authorised for issue.
(K. H. KIRKLAND)
Major General
General Officer Commanding
7610-66-125-4288
Notified in DI (ADMIN) 20 series for 1986
ii
CONDITIONS OF RELEASE
1. This document contains Australian Defence information. All De-
fence information, whether classified or not, is protected from unauthor-
ised disclosure under the Crimes Act 1914 (Commonwealth). Defence
information may only be released in accordance with SECMAN 4 and/or
DI(G) OPS 13-4 as appropriate.
2. When this information is supplied to Commonwealth or foreign gov-

ernments, the recipient is to ensure that it will:
a. be safeguarded under rules designed to give it the equiva-

lent standard of security to that maintained for it by Aus-
tralia;
b. not be released to a third country without Australian con-
sent;
c. not be used for other than military purposes;
d. not be divulged to a non-Defence organisation unless that
organisation is sponsored and cleared by an accepted De-
OBSOLETE
fence organisation (‘sponsoring’ means giving an assurance
that the organisation has a need to know for Defence pur-
poses; ‘clearing’ means guaranteeing for security); and
e. not be downgraded or declassified without Australian Gov-
ernment approval.
Released to: ……………………………………………………………
Released by: ……………………………………………………………

(Signature)
……………………………………………………………
(Appointment)
Date Released: ……………………………………………………………
© This work is copyright. Apart from any use as permitted under the Copyright Act
1968, no part may be reproduced by any process without written permission from
Doctrine Production, Force Development Group, Combined Arms Training and
Development Centre, Tobruk Barracks, PUCKAPUNYAL VIC 3662.
iii
Australian Army Manual of Land Warfare, Part Two,

Infantry Training, Volume 1, Pamphlet No 2,
The Rifle Platoon, 1986.
Doctrine Production, Force Development Group, Combined

Arms Training and Development Centre is responsible for the
management and sponsorship of this pamphlet. The doctrine
contained herein was approved on 4 July 1986.
AMENDMENT CERTIFICATE
1. Proposals for amendments or additions to the text of this pam-
phlet should be made through normal channels to the sponsor. To facili-
tate this, there are amendment proposal forms at the back of this
publication.
2. It is certified that the amendments promulgated in the under-
mentioned amendment lists have been made in this pamphlet.
Amendment List Amended By (Printed Date of Amending
OBSOLETE
Name and Initials)
Number Date
1. 30/11/99 Doctrine Production 18/07/00

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
iv
DISTRIBUTION
Australian Army (Less RA Inf) Scale C

RA Inf Scale F
Training Quantities
RMC 300
JSSC 20
AJWE 50
C&SC 50
LWC 100
Armoured Centre 50
School of Artillery 50
School of Miltary Engineering 50
School of Signals 50
OBSOLETE
Infantry Centre 150
School of Military Intelligence 40
Army School of Transport 40
RAAOC Centre 40
RAEME Training Centre 40
1 Training Group 100
4 Training Group 75
5 Training Group 75
6 Training Group 50
v
PREFACE
Aim
1. The aim of this pamphlet is to provide the doctrine for the employ-
ment and training of the rifle platoons of a standard infantry battalion.
Level
2. This pamphlet is written for company, platoon and section com-

manders, staff officers, officers and non-commissioned officers of the other
Arms and Services, and students at Army schools who require an under-
standing of basic infantry doctrine.
Scope
3. The pamphlet reflects the operation of the platoons with a standard

infantry battalion deployed to conduct conventional operations. It ex-
OBSOLETE
pands upon the doctrine contained in MLW Two, Inf Trg 1.1, The Infantry
Battalion but is specifically related to the employment of the infantry rifle
platoon.
Gender
4. Words importing gender refer to both male and female, unless spe-
cifically stated otherwise.
Associated Publications
5. The pamphlet takes into account the doctrine contained in other

Australian Army Manual of Land Warfare pamphlets and Joint Service
Publications. Repetition has been avoided as far as possible. Where repeti-
tion occurs, the matter has been included in the interests of clarity and
completeness. Much of the data and doctrine referred to in this pamphlet
has been extracted from the publications and summarised where neces-
sary and included in MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.2, Infantry Commanders
Aide-Memoire.
vi
OBSOLETE
vii
CONTENTS
Page
Title Page i
Conditions of Release ii
Amendment Certificate iii
Distribution iv
Preface v
Contents vii
Abbreviations xix
Section Paragraph
PART ONE. COMBAT POWER

CHAPTER 1. ORGANISATION
1-1 General 101
Introduction 101
The Operational Environment 103
OBSOLETE
1-2 Organisation and Role 108
Role 108
Tasks 109
1-3 The Standard Infantry Battalion 111
The Battalion 111
The Rifle Company 112
1-4 The Rifle Platoon 115
Organisation of the Rifle Platoon 115
Organisation of the Rifle Section 117
Strength 119
Responsibilities and Duties - Platoon Headquarters 123
Responsibilities and Duties - Rifle Section 128
1-5 Weapons and Equipment 137
General 137
Load Carrying Capabilities of Soldiers 141
Annexes:
A. Organisation of the Standard Infantry Battalion
B. Detailed Organisation of the Rifle Company
C. The Use of Initiative - Historical Examples - World War 1
D. Equipment Weight Table
viii
Section Paragraph
CHAPTER 2 COMBAT SUPPORT

2-1 Introduction 201
2-2 Rifle Company 202
2-3 Support Company 205
General 205
Mortar Platoon 206
Anti-armour Platoon 212
Assault Pioneer Platoon 215
Sustained Fire Machine Gun Platoon 218
Signals Platoon 223
2-4 Armour 227
General 227
Tanks 228
APC's 246
2-5 Artillery 254
General 254
Artillery Fire 255
Artillery Tasks 257
OBSOLETE
How to Get Artillery Support
Troop Safety
Fire Planning
Shelling and Mortaring Reports
260
264
265
266
2-6 Engineers 269
General 269
Engineer Tasks 272
Cooperation 276
Further Information 277
2-7 Aviation 278
General 278
Reconnaissance 279
Observation of Fire 281
Assistance in Command and Liaison 282
2-8 Air Support 289
General 289
Close Air Support 291
Aerial Reconnaissance and Surveillance 294
Resupply by Air 296
Air Movement 298
Aeromedical Evacuation 299
ix
Section Paragraph
Annexes:
A. Infantry/Tank Target Indication
B. Artillery and Mortar Target Grid Procedures
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS

3-1 Tactical Information 301
General 301
Information Required 304
Obtaining Information 308
3-2 Reporting 311
General 311
Method of Reporting 314
3-3 Communications Within the Rifle Company 318
General 318
Radio 319
Line 325
Personal Contact 326
OBSOLETE
Runner 327
Light and Smoke Signals 328
Communications Within the Platoon 329
3-4 Security of Information 334
General 334
Enemy Sources of Information in the Field 335
Radio and Telephone Security 336
Annex:
A. Standard Radio Diagram for the Rifle Company
CHAPTER 4 LEADERSHIP
4-1 Leadership in Battle 401
General 401
Discipline 405
Morale 408
The Leader 409
CHAPTER 5 ADMINISTRATION
5-1 General 501
5-2 Platoon Commander's Responsibilities 504
General 504
Platoon Commander's Notebook 505
x
Section Paragraph
5-3 Resupply 507

The Resupply System 507
Ammunition 512
Water 516
Rations 519
Other Stores 526
Resupply by Air 529
5-4 Battle Casualties 530
First Aid 530
Evacuation 533
Enemy and Civilian Casualties 537
Burials 539
5-5 Reinforcements 542
General 542
5-6 Welfare 544
5-7 Prisoners of War 550
Conduct if Taken Prisoner 550
Enemy Prisoners 551
OBSOLETE
5-8 Health and Hygiene 552
PART TWO. BATTLECRAFT
CHAPTER 6 TACTICAL FORMATIONS AND CONTACT DRILLS

6-1 General 601
6-2 Section Formations 602
General 602
6-3 Platoon Formations 610
General 610
Basic Formations 613
6-4 Contact Drill 616
General 616
Basic Drill 618
Contact Drill 622
Contact Front 628
Contact Rear 634
Immediate Ambush and Counter Ambush 638
Platoon Contact Drills 639
CHAPTER 7. CLOSING WITH THE ENEMY

7-1 General 701
xi
Section Paragraph
7-2 Use of Covered/Concealed Approaches 703

General 703
Selection of Lines of Advance 704
7-3 Use of Smoke or Darkness 706
Use of Smoke 706
Movement by Night 708
7-4 Fire and Movement 711
General 711
Basic Considerations 713
Control 714
Speed 717
Winning the Fire Fight 718
Wide Angle of Covering Fire 720
Maximum Use of Cover and Concealment 721
Minimum Exposed Movement Without Covering Fire 723
Techniques and Training 724
Aggression 733
OBSOLETE
7-5 Mounted Platoons 734
CHAPTER 8. PROTECTION
8-1 General 801
8-2 Protection at Rest 808
General 808
Brief Halts in Open and Close Country 810
Extended Halts in Open Country 823
8-3 Sentries 825
General 825
Sentry Orders 827
Sentry's Task 828
Challenging 830
Passwords 832
Number of Sentries 834
Night Sentry Roster 836
The Section MG at Night 837
8-4 Protection against Air Attack 839
General 839
Concealment 840
xii
Section Paragraph
Dispersion 843
Digging In 846
Early Warning 847
Action When Attacked 849
8-5 NBC Protection 852
Protection Against Blast Effects 852
Immediate Actions 853
Personal Decontamination 854
Threat Oriented Protective Posture (TOPP) Levels 855
Operational Limitations 856
Annex:
A Sentry Orders
CHAPTER 9. BATTLE PROCEDURE

9-1 General 901
OBSOLETE
Introduction 901
Aim of Battle Procedure 903
Sequence of Battle Procedure 905
9-2 Roles and Grouping 906
General 906
9-3 Warning Order 913
9-4 Reconnaissance 920
9-5 Appreciation 924
General 924
The Aim 926
Factors - General 930
Factors - Enemy 933
Factors - Own Forces 934
Factors - Ground 935
Factors - Time and Space 944
Courses Open 949
Plan 952
9-6 Orders 954
General 954
Sequence 956
Detailed Content 957
Presentation 958
xiii
Section Paragraph
Patrol and Ambush Orders 961

Snap Orders and Radio Orders 962
Annex:
A. Sequence of Battle Procedure
CHAPTER 10. NEGOTIATING OBSTACLES

10-1 General 1001
10-2 Gapping Wire Obstacles 1004
Method of Making Gaps 1004
10-3 Breaching Minefields 1008
General 1008
Methods of Breaching a Minefield 1011
Lanes 1014
10-4 Negotiating Water Obstacles 1016
General 1016
Methods of Crossing 1018
10-5 Contaminated Areas 1025
OBSOLETE
General 1025
PART THREE. TACTICS
CHAPTER 11. ADVANCE AND PURSUIT

11-1 General 1101
The Advance 1101
The Pursuit 1103
Advancing Force Grouping 1106
Groups and Tasks 1107
Battalion Deployment 1108
Platoon and Section Roles 1109
Stages 1110
11-2 The Preparatory Stage 1111
General 1111
Control 1113
Rate of Advance 1119
Firepower 1124
Protection 1127
Advancing With Armoured Support 1131
xiv
Section Paragraph
11-3 Conduct of the Advance 1132

General 1132
Aspects of Specific Tasks 1133
CHAPTER 12. ATTACK

12-1 General 1201
Introduction 1201
Types of Attack 1203
Quick Attack 1205
Deliberate Attack 1207
Key Considerations for the Attack 1208
Stages of the Attack 1209
12-2 The Preparatory Stage 1210
General 1210
Company Commander's Orders 1211
Warning Order 1212
Reconnaissance 1215
OBSOLETE
Appreciation and Planning 1222
Orders 1225
Preparing for the Attack 1228
Movement to the FUP 1234
Action in the FUP 1234
Movement to the LD 1236
12-3 The Assault Stage 1237
Fire Support 1237
Assault Formations 1240
Movement to the Objective 1248
The Break-In 1255
Fighting Through the Objective 1256
12-4 The Exploitation Stage 1264
General 1264
12-5 Reorganisation 1267
General 1267
Examples 1273
12-6 The Rifle Platoon in the Company Attack 1274
General 1274
Assault Group 1275
Depth Platoon 1276
Fire Support 1278
xv
Section Paragraph
12-7 Support for the Attack 1282

General 1282
12-8 Night Attack 1286
General 1286
Movement to the FUP and Forming Up 1290
Movement to the Objective 1292
Fighting Through the Objective 1298
Reorganisation 1299
12-9 Attacking Trench Systems and Strong Points 12103
General 12103
Open Trenches 12105
Small Bunkers 12107
Deliberate Attack 12109
CHAPTER 13. DEFENCE

13-1 General 1301
OBSOLETE
Introduction 1301
Use of Ground 1309
Mutual Support 1314
All Round Defence 1315
Control 1316
Depth 1317
Centralisation of Firepower 1318
Security 1319
13-2 The Defensive Layout 1320
General 1320
Types of Positions 1321
Platoon Headquarters 1322
Fire Trenches 1324
Camouflage 1326
Latrines 1327
Fire Lanes 1328
Arcs and Tasks of the Section MG 1331
Staking the Arc 1334
Use of Fixed Lines 1336
Obstacles 1337
xvi
Section Paragraph
13-3 Planning and Occupying the Position 1338

Battle Procedure 1338
Occupation 1346
13-4 Conduct of the Defence 1351
Routine 1351
Security 1352
Clearing Patrols 1355
Carriage of Weapons 1358
Conduct Under Attack 1359
Attack by Night 1366
Local Counter-attack 1369
13-5 Relief In Place 1371
General 1371
Advance Party 1372
Information Required 1373
Preparation 1374
Platoon Representative in the Advance Party 1375
Sequence of Relief 1376
Passage of Command 1377
14-1 OBSOLETE
General
CHAPTER 14. WITHDRAWAL
Introduction
1401
1401
Considerations 1405
Stages 1406
14-2 Planning and Preparation 1407
What the Platoon Commander Must Know 1407
Effects of Topography and Meteorology 1408
Control 1409
Orders 1411
Administration 1412
14-3 Conduct 1413
14-4 Occupation of the New Defensive Position 1420
PART 4. TRAINING
CHAPTER 15. TRAINING THE PLATOON
15-1 Conduct of Training 1501
General 1501
The Programme 1505
Running the Programme 1510
xvii
Section Paragraph
15-2 Night Training 1514

General 1514
Training Content 1518
Fatigue, Stress and Safety 1520
15-3 Assistance from Specialist Platoons 1523
15-4 Unscheduled Training 1524
General 1524
15-5 Competition in Training 1527
General 1527
Annexes:
A. Examples of Training Notes
B. Competition Activities
ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Page
OBSOLETE
1-1 Concept of the Second Somme Offensive 1C-1
1-2 Actions of 12th Australian Field Coy Sappers 1C-2
1-3 Route of the Australian Patrol 1C-2
2-1 Platoon Mounted Formations 2-15
2-2 Target Indication - Gun Barrel Method 2A-2
2-3 Axis of Hull or Axis of Advance 2A-3
2-4 Adjustment of Fire 2B-5
6-1 Single File 6-2
6-2 Staggered File 6-3
6-3 Open File 6-4
6-4 Arrowhead 6-5
6-5 Extended line 6-6
6-6 Platoon Formation 6-7
6-7 Situation at Time of 'Contact Front' 6-11
6-8 Situation After Order 'Contact Front' 6-11
6-9 Situation at Time of 'Contact Rear' 6-13
6-10 Situation After Order 'Contact Rear' 6-14
6-11 Situation Before and After 'Contact Front' 6-14
6-12 Situation Before and After 'Contact Rear' 6-15
7-1 Wide Angle of Covering Fire 7-6
8-1 General Layout and Occupation of a Platoon Harbour
in Close Country 8-4
8-2 Clearing Patrols and Sentries 8-6
xviii
Figure Page
10-1 Crossing at 800 mils Downstream 10-5

10-2 Improvised Floatation Aids 10-6
11-1 Grouping of the Advanced Forces 11-2
11-2 Typical Battalion Deployment in the Advance 11-3
12-1 Platoon Attack - One Section Up 12-11
12-2 Platoon Attack - Two Sections Up 12-11
12-3 Examples of a Platoon attack 12-18
12-4 Platoon Attacking a Pillbox 12-26
13-1 Typical Independent Platoon Defensive Layout 13-6
14-1 Control Measures in the Withdrawal 14-6
Plate
13-1 Staking the Primary Arc 13-9
13-2 Fixed Lines 13-10
Table
1-1 Equipment Weight Table 1D-1
2-1
2-2
3-1
8-1
OBSOLETE
Target Grid Corrections
Example of the Process of Adjustment
Countering Enemy Information Sources
Standard Sentry Challenging Procedure
2B-4
2B-6
3-8
8-9
8-2 Example Night Sentry Roster 8-10
8-3 Threat-Oriented Protection Posture Levels 8-16
RESTRICTED
xix
ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations are used in this publication. Their

sources are as shown.
JSP (AS) 101
AFV Armoured Fighting Vehicle
AO Area of Operations
APC Armoured Personnel Carrier
BC Battery Commander
CAIRS Close Air Support
CES Complete Equipment Schedule
CP Command Post
CZ Combat Zone
DF Defensive Fire
ECM Electronic Counter-measures
OBSOLETE
EOD Explosive Ordnance Disposal
EW Electronic Warfare
FAC Forward Air Controller
FO Forward Observer
FPF Final Protective Fire
FUP Forming Up Place
HE High Explosive
HF High Frequency
LD Line of Departure
LO Liaison Officer
MFC Mortar Fire Controller
MG Machine Gun
NBC Nuclear, Biological and Chemical
OGp Orders Group
OP Observation Post
Orbat Order of Battle
PD Point Detonating (Fuse)
RAP Regimental Aid Post
xx
RCL Recoilless Rifle
Rgp Reconnaissance Group
RV Rendezvous
SHELREP Shelling Report
SOI Signals Operating Instructions
SOP Standing Operating Instructions
TCV Troop Carrying Vehicle
UHF Ultra High Frequency
VHF Very High Frequency
WP White Phosphorus
Common Military Usage

APDS Armour Piercing - Discarding Sabot
BE Base Ejection
CAP Company Aid Post
CASEVAC Casualty Evacuation
CRP
CRW
CS
OBSOLETE Combat Ration Pack
Counter Revolutionary Warfare
Riot Control/Training Agent
DUSTOFF Forward Aeromedical Evacuation
ENGREP Engineering Report
FAD First Aid Dressing
GPMG General Purpose Machine Gun
GSMG General Support Machine Gun
HEAT High Explosive Anti-tank
HEDP High Explosive Dual Purpose
HEP-T High Explosive Plastic with Tracer
HESH High Explosive Squash Head
HMG Heavy Machine Gun
IET Initial Employment Training
lkd Linked
LP Listening Post
MA Muzzle Action
xxi
MAINTDEM Maintenance Demand
MORTREP Mortaring Bombing Report
MRAAW Medium Range Anti-armour Weapon
OPDEM Operational Demand
OT Line Observer to Target
PAL Patrol Ambush Light
PEWS Platoon Early Warning System
PLC Projected Line Charge
PRIMAINTDEM Priority Maintenance Demand
RHU Reinforcement Holding Unit
RMO Regimental Medical Officer
RSO Regimental Signals Officer
SFMG Sustained Fire Machine Gun
SLR Self Loading Rifle
SRAAW Short Range Anti-armour Weapons
TGP Target Grid Procedure
TOET
TOPPOBSOLETETests of Elementary Training
Threat Oriented Protective Posture
xxii
OBSOLETE
1–1
PART ONE. COMBAT POWER

CHAPTER 1. ORGANISATION
‘..the four best commands in the Service - a platoon, a
battalion, a division and an army. A platoon because it is
your first command, because you are young and because,
if you are any good, you know the men in it better than
their mothers do and love them as much.'
- Field Marshal Sir William Slim
SECTION 1-1. GENERAL
`Combat Power - The total means of destructive and/or disruptive force

which a military unit/formation can apply against the opponent at a
given time.'
JSP (AS) 101 (A)
Introduction
OBSOLETE
101. Part One of this pamphlet deals with the main elements which
make up combat power.
102. The other three parts of this pamphlet cover the doctrine,
techniques and training which must be mastered by the platoon
commander, NCOs and soldiers. The other parts are:
a. Part Two - Battlecraft,
b. Part Three - Tactics, and
c. Part Four - Training.
The Operational Environment
103. Physical Environment. The infantryman must be trained and
prepared to fight in all environments found on the Australian mainland, in
its territories and, if required, in an overseas theatre. Training in
peacetime covers both open and close terrain. From these two broad
categories, individual and collective skills are learned, which are adaptable
to other areas.
104. Organisations. Units and formations will, to a large extent,
determine the emphasis on the training which a platoon will be required to
do. This pamphlet will provide guidance for training, but emphasis will
change depending on the organisation and role of the unit or formation.
1–2
105. The Enemy. The Musorians are a hypothetical enemy designed to
create a realistic training scenario. They provide a model for setting
training requirements. The following, less familiar aspects of the enemy
must always be considered in training:
a. Electronic Warfare (EW). EW is the military use of the electro-
magnetic spectrum to influence operations. It must be assumed
that enemy EW measures will be employed so our training
must include EW.
b. Surveillance. There has been an increased capability in ground
surveillance equipment and techniques. Image intensification
and thermal imagery equipment (both active and passive), ra-
dars, and seismic devices are becoming more commonplace. It
must be assumed that the enemy will employ these
equipments.
c. Air Superiority. The Musorians have a full range of proven
weapons, including aircraft. The air threat must be considered
in any phase of training and/or operations.
106. Night Operations. Night operations give greater security from
OBSOLETE
enemy air and surveillance threats. They give sonic tactical advantages
and opportunities for surprise. Night operations are difficult and night
training is necessary.
107. Patrolling. Patrolling is an essential element of all operations and
will be a normal activity at the section, platoon and company levels. Much
of the doctrine and techniques described in this pamphlet concern
patrolling. Detailed information on patrolling is found in MLW Two, Inf
Trg 3.3, Patrolling and Tracking.
SECTION 1-2. ORGANISATION AND ROLE

Role
108. The role of the infantry platoon is to seek out and close with the
enemy, to kill or capture him, to seize and hold ground and repel attack, by
day and night, in any weather or terrain.
Tasks
109. The platoon will usually operate as part of a rifle company in a
battalion setting, as it is dependent on its parent sub-unit and unit for
combat and administrative support. The platoon may be employed on
independent tasks for limited periods.
1–3
110. The platoon can undertake the following tasks:
a. kill or capture the enemy;
b. seize and hold ground for limited periods;
c. impose delay on the enemy by firepower and movement;
d. deny information to the enemy by concealment and patrolling;
e. gain topographical and enemy information by observation and
f. patrolling;
g. protect elements of the battalion or supporting arms and ser-
vices;
h. provide escorts, or carry out civilian/refugee control duties; and
i. provide aid to the civil power.
SECTION 1-3. THE STANDARD INFANTRY BATTALION
The Battalion
111. The outline organisation of the standard infantry battalion is
OBSOLETE
shown in Annex A to this chapter. The organisation of the standard
infantry battalion and the way in which it operates are described in detail
in MLW Two, Inf Trg 1.1, The Infantry Battalion.
The Rifle Company
112. The rifle company consists of a headquarters, three rifle platoons
and a support section. The detailed organisation of the rifle company is
shown in Annex B to this chapter.
113. The tasks that a rifle company is capable of undertaking and the
responsibilities of key personnel in company headquarters, are detailed in
MLW Two, Inf Trg 1.1, The Infantry Battalion. Depending on the task, the
rifle company usually needs the assistance of the specialists from support
and administrative companies such as:
a. a mortar fire controller (MFC),
b. a medical assistant,
c. stretcher bearers,
d. radio operators,
e. cooks,
f. drivers, and
g. RAEME technicians.
1–4
114. The rifle company also relies on combat support from the battalion
mortar, assault pioneer, anti-armour and machine gun (MG) platoons in
addition to any other combat support which may be available, such as
armour and artillery.
SECTION 1-4. THE RIFLE PLATOON

Organisation of the Rifle Platoon
115. The rifle platoon consists of a headquarters and three sections. The
detailed organisation is shown in Annex B to this chapter.
116. Rifle platoons are numbered consecutively throughout the
battalion, eg, the rifle platoons of A company are 1, 2, and 3; those of B
Company are 4, 5 and 6; and so on.
Organisation of the Rifle Section
117. The rifle section comprises one corporal, one lance corporal and
seven private soldiers. For ease of control the section is divided into
predetermined groups, making the section commander's task much easier
during training and on operations. The section may be divided into:
OBSOLETE
a. the scout group (two men),
b. MG group (three men including the section 2IC), and
c. the rifle group (three men).
The section commander usually moves with the rifle group. One man in
any group which is not commanded by an NCO acts as the leader.
118. In war, the section has to function as a team in which each place is
filled by the best available man. The aim of training is to produce a section
team of experts, with adequate reserves for each group.
Strength
119. The number of soldiers in a platoon may be less than the number of
men authorised in the establishment. The strength will vary according to
the casualty rate and the flow of reinforcements.
120. If there have been heavy casualties it may be necessary to
amalgamate or reorganise some platoons and sections. Section integrity
should be maintained and individuals not moved to other sections,
especially if the low strength is a temporary circumstance. If
amalgamation is necessary, it is better to keep the understrength section
as a group of a larger organisation than split up the individuals.
Experience has indicated that sections cannot operate effectively below a
1–5
strength of one NCO and four men. Below this strength, the section's
ability to keep operating on sustained operations falls off. With reduced
numbers sentry rosters, patrolling tasks, work party duties and other day
to day requirements will have to be modified and carefully controlled.
121. A platoon of less than eighteen men may require reorganising into
a fighting patrol configuration of two section groups and a command
group, but retaining section integrity wherever possible.
122. The acceptable strength of platoons is a matter for the CO to decide.
He may order amalgamation or reorganisation at any time.
Responsibilities and Duties - Platoon Headquarters
123. Platoon Commander. The platoon commander is responsible to
his OC for the training, operation, discipline, administration and welfare
of his platoon. He must understand his company commander's aims and
intentions, and be prepared to implement them even in the absence of
given orders. It is his duty to ensure that:
a. the security of his platoon is maintained;
b. all tasks allotted to his platoon are properly carried out;
OBSOLETE
c. he has a thorough knowledge of, and can implement, platoon
training techniques, tactics and administration;
d. he has a thorough knowledge of platoon battle procedure;
e. his platoon is well trained, ensuring that all ranks are trained to
perform the role of their next superior;
f. a high standard of discipline and morale is maintained;
g. he knows all of his men well, particularly their individual
strengths and weaknesses, and has an understanding of their
personal problems;
h. he and his men keep physically fit;
i. a high standard of both collective and personal hygiene is main-
tained;
j. he inspects his men regularly to see that they are properly
clothed and equipped, their weapons and equipment are kept
clean and in good working order;
k. he checks his men regularly to ensure that they are not suffer-
ing from injuries (eg blisters, chafing); and
l. a proper balance is maintained between work and rest periods.
1–6
124. Platoon Sergeant. The platoon sergeant is the platoon 2IC and
must be conversant with all the duties of the platoon commander. In the
absence of the platoon commander he will command the platoon. He is also
responsible to the platoon commander for the day to day administration of
the platoon. His duties include:
a. understudying the platoon commander;
b. maintaining the platoon roll book and duty rosters;
c. assisting the platoon commander in maintaining a high stan-
dard of discipline and morale within the platoon;
d. supervising the training done by section commanders; and
e. the collection and distribution to sections of ammunition, ra-
tions, water and other stores and supplies.
125. Rifleman (Orderly/Runner). The orderly/runner is to:
a. look after the platoon commander's personal needs in the field,
such as packing his gear, cleaning his clothes and equipment and
preparing his meals;
b. carry written or verbal messages;
c.
d.
OBSOLETE
act as a relief radio operator; and
carry out the duties of a rifleman.
126. The rifleman selected to perform the duties of the orderly/runner
should ideally be the next soldier in line for promotion. The soldier will
gain experience that he would not gain as a rifleman. He will gain an
insight into platoon operations that will be invaluable to him when he is
promoted. The soldier should be articulate and highly proficient in all
infantry skills as he may be required to perform a variety of duties not
listed above, including:
a. preparation of improvised models for platoon orders,
b. acting as a platoon guide, or
c. providing protection for the platoon commander during recon-
naissance.
127. Radio Operator. The radio operator is a signals trained
rifleman, whose duties are to:
a. maintain communications with other stations on the company
net,
b. transmit and receive messages,
1–7
c. encode and decode messages,

d. maintain the platoon radio set in operational order at all times,
and
e. carry out the duties of a rifleman.
Responsibilities and Duties - Rifle Section
128. All members of the rifle section must be proficient in all the duties
and responsibilities of the rifleman. These are:
a. being proficient at:
(1) handling all platoon weapons,
(2) fieldcraft,
(3) basic navigation,
(4) marksmanship,
(5) tracking, and
(6) first aid;
b. keeping his weapon and ammunition clean and in operational
order;
c.
d.
OBSOLETE
ensuring that his clothing and equipment are clean and in good
repair; and
keeping physically fit and healthy.
129. Additional duties for individual members of the section are detailed
in paragraphs 130 to 135.
130. Section Commander. The section commander's responsibilities
to his section are similar to those the platoon commander has to his
platoon. He must understand his platoon commander's aims and
intentions and be prepared to implement them even in the absence of
given orders. It is his duty to ensure that:
a. the security of his section is maintained;
b. all tasks allotted to his section are carried out efficiently;
c. he has a thorough knowledge of section battle procedure and in-
fantry skills;
d. his section is well trained;
e. the highest standard of discipline is maintained within his sec-
tion;
f. he knows the strength and weaknesses of all of his men, and he
has an understanding of their personal problems;
1–8
g. his section maintains its weapons, ammunition, clothing and

equipment in good order;
h. his men observe all orders on health; and
i. the section duty roster is properly kept and carried out.
131. Section 2IC. The section 2IC understudies the section commander
and usually commands the MG group. In the absence of the section
commander he will command the section. His duties include:
a. the collection and distribution of ammunition, rations, water,
stores and other supplies;
b. assisting the section commander in maintaining a high stan-
dard of discipline within the section; and
c. controlling the fire and movement of the MG team.
132. No 1 on Section MG. The No 1 on the MG is to:
a. ensure that the section MG is maintained in operational order,
b. carry the MG and ammunition, and
133.
c.
OBSOLETE
fire the MG as ordered.
No 2 on Section MG. The No 2 on the MG is to:
a. assist the No 1 by observing and correcting fire,
b. assist the No 1 in target location,
c. carry additional ammunition for the MG and feed the ammuni-
tion to the gun (if required),
d. assist the No 1 to maintain the gun, and
e. be prepared to take over the MG if the No 1 becomes a casualty.
134. Grenadier/Rifleman. The grenadier/rifleman has the additional
responsibilities for:
a. ensuring that the grenade launcher is kept in operational order,
b. carrying the grenade launcher and ammunitions and
c. firing the grenade launcher as ordered.
135. Scouts. The scouts lead the section during patrolling operations
and during the advance. They are primarily responsible for providing early
warning to the section. Scouts should be alternated regularly.
1–9
136. Initiative. Each member of the platoon must understand his
superiors aims and intentions and be prepared to implement them even in
the absence of given orders. Historical examples illustrating the use of
initiative are contained in Annex C.
SECTION 1-5. WEAPONS AND EQUIPMENT

General
137. Each section has an MG as well as rifles and a grenade launcher. In
addition, depending on the type of operation and the task, members of the
section may be armed with the following weapons:
a. short range anti-armour weapons (SRAAW), or
b. grenades and pyrotechnics
138. With these weapons the platoon can bring formidable fire to bear.
139. The characteristics of the current infantry weapons, doctrine
covering training with the weapons and the tactical employment of the
weapons are contained in pamphlets in the following MLW 2, Inf volumes:
a. Volume 4, Infantry Small Arms.
b.
c.
OBSOLETE
Volume 6, Anti-armour Weapons.
Volume 7, Grenades and Pyrotechnics.
d. Volumes 4 and 7, Grenade Launcher.
140. The platoon may also be equipped with a range of surveillance
equipment and other infantry specialist equipment. The characteristics of
the current surveillance devices, doctrine and the tactical employment of
the equipment are described in MLW Two, Inf Trg Volume 9, Infantry
Equipment range of pamphlets.
Load Carrying Capabilities of Soldiers
141. Commanders must limit the load to be carried by soldiers to the
minimum required for the operation or task. There is a tendency for
commanders and individuals to add extra equipment and ammunition as
a precautionary measure. The advantages of comfort and increased
self-sufficiency must be weighed up against the disadvantage of reduced
efficiency; as the load increases the efficiency of the soldier decreases.
AL1
1–10
142. Annex D to this chapter tabulates the weight of weapons,
equipments and items available for use by the infantry soldier. A soldier
should be able to carry about 1/3 of his body weight and still remain
effective for extended operational periods.
143. Field Orders of Dress. Orders of dress not only list the items
carried by a soldier, but imply the duration of a task. Platoon commanders
should be aware of this relationship and select appropriate orders of dress.
Orders of dress are given in Standing Operating Procedures (SOPs), and
can be modified to suit the requirement.
144. Porterage. Platoons may be required to carry out porterage tasks,
such as moving ammunition, explosives, rations and defence stores.
Porterage is normally an administrative requirement and much greater
loads will be carried than for normal patrolling.
Annexes: A. Organisation of The Standard Infantry Battalion
B. Detailed Organisation of the Rifle Company
C. The Use of Initiative - Historical Examples -
World War 1
OBSOLETE
D. Equipment Weight Table
1A–1
ANNEX A
CHAPTER 1
ORGANISATION OF THE STANDARD INFANTRY

BATTALION
HQ 5-26
Int Sniper
Sect 1-7 Sect 0-7
4
Admin Rifle Spt
5-84 8-179
Coy Coy Coy
5-103
OBSOLETE
HQ 2-5 HQ 2-7 HQ 2-6
QM Tech Spt
Pl 2-36 Pl
0-15
3
Med Spt Rifle
Pl Sect Pl
1-30
1-28 0-6
Mor Anti Armd SFMG Aslt Pnr Sig

Pl Pl Pl Pl Pl
2-35 1-39 1-35 1-28 1-36
Summary
Offr OR Total Lt Veh Mdm Lt Mdm LMG GPMG SFMG SRAAW SRAAW 81mm
Veh Tlr Tlr 84mm 106mm Mor
39 717 756 51 18 67 3 16 71 6 8 8 6
1A–2
OBSOLETE
RESTRICTED
1B–1
ANNEX B TO
CHAPTER 1
DETAILED ORGANISATION OF THE RIFLE COMPANY
DETAILED ORGANISATION OF THE RIFLE COMPANY
HQ 2-7
Orderlies Pte (2)
OC Maj Storeman Pte
2IC Capt Driver Pte
CSM WO2 2 x Light Vehs
CQMS SSgt 1 x Mdm Veh
Clerk Cpl 1 x GPMG
Rifle Pl Spt Sect

1-30
Cpl
OBSOLETE
Riflemen Ptes (5)
HQ 1-3 2 x SRAAW (84mm)
OC Lt
2IC Sgt
3 Orderlies Pte (2)
Rifle
Sect 0-9
Cpl
Lcpl
MG No5 Ptes (2)
Riflemen Ptes (5)
1 x GPMG
Summary
Offrs ORs Total Light Mdm GP SRAAW

Veh Veh MG 84mm
5 103 108 2 1 10 2
1B–2
OBSOLETE
1C–1
ANNEX C TO
CHAPTER 1
THE USE OF INITIATIVE
HISTORICAL EXAMPLES - WORLD WAR I
Background
1. The Second Somme Offensive commenced on the morning of 8
August 1918. The British III Corps advanced north of the River
Somme, while the Australian Corps, 2nd and 3rd Divisions leading,
advanced south of the river.
2. The first stage was carried out entirely in dense fog. Vision was
further impaired by the inclusion of white smoke-shell in the barrage.
The German resistance was minimal. The Australian Corps had in the
previous months gained "a mastery over the enemy" to such an extent
that the Germans often surrendered at the first hint of attack.
3. The 2nd and 3rd Divisions secured their objective early in the
morning and commenced digging in. The 4th and 5th Divisions took up
OBSOLETE
the advance.
4. On the left flank, the British III Corps could not keep up with
the Australian advance. The German gunners, firing from the dense
woods and from Chipilly Peninsula, which jutted out from the north-
ern side in a hairpin loop in the river, fired with impunity into the
flank of the 4th Division streaming past on the exposed slopes south of
the River Somme.
e
omm
4 AU RS
ST D Hamel
Fouilloy IV Chipilly
3 AUS
T DIV
Morcourt
ve
cti
5 AU
ST
bje
2 AU DIV
XX
tO
ST D Warfusee
IV
1s
Lamotte
ctive
Villers-Bretonneux Bayonvillers
3rd Obje
2 CANADIAN
DIV XXX
tive
Harbonnieres
jec
Ob
2nd
N
1 CDN R. Luce
DIV 0 2000 4000 Yards
Figure 1-1. Concept of the Second Somme Offensive

1C–2
Narrative One
Q Q Q
QQ Q Q Q
QQ Q Q Q Q
Q Q
ne
Li
Q Malard Wd Q Q
h
Q Q Q Q Q
s
iti
mme
Q
Br
QQQ
Q
Q Q German Batteries
Q QQ Q
R. So
Q Q Q Q QQ Q
Q Q QQ Q Q
Celestins Wd
Q Q QQ
QQ Q Q
Q Q
Chipilly Q
ers
Q Q Q Q
QQ
pp
Q Q Mericourt
Sa
QQ Q
1st Objective
Cerisy Q Q
Q QQ
Q
Q Q Q
Q Q
QQQ
Fl
4 Bde
an
k
of N
OBSOLETE
Morcourt
0 2000
Yards
Figure 1-2. Actions of 12th Australian Field Coy Sappers
5. When the British 3rd Corps failed to make progress opposite

Chipilly on the left flank, two sappers of the 12th Australian Field Coy
working on repairing a bridge, observed from their point of vantage in
rear of the 4th Australian Division, that the English flank company
was held up by a nest of machine gunners on a forward ridge. They de-
cided, on their own accord, to end the impasse themselves by rushing
the enemy position from the flank. They ran across an open field sev-
eral hundred yards wide and attacked the German machine gunners
from the rear. The Germans, apparently thinking they were part of a
large force, hoisted a white flag. The British then came forward and
carried on to the next spur.
1C–3
Narrative Two
Q QQ Q Q
Q Q
rbie R
d Q Q Q Q
Co Q
Bray- Q Q Q QQ
Q Q QQ QQ Q
Q Q
Ge
rm Q Q Q QQ Q
an Q Q Q QQ Q
Q QQ Q Q Q
Q Q QQ Gressaire Wood
Q
Q Q Q QQ
131 Q
AN QQ
AMERIC
Defe
Q
REGT
nce
Q Q Q
Q Q Q Q
Q Q QQ German Post
Malard Wood Q Q
Line
Q Q
Q QQ Q Q QQ Q
2 QQ QQQ Q
10 LOND QQ Q Q
Q
Berrell
Quarry
OBSOLETE
rol
Pat
mme
Chipilly
R. So
Cerisy
Morcourt 4 BDE
0 2000
Yards N
Figure 1-3. Route of the Australian Patrol
6. An Australian patrol of six men, led by two NCO's that had pre-
viously been through the village of Chipilly, was sent across the river
by their commanding officer to assist the British forward brigade.
There they spoke to the company commander of a British battalion
whose men were sheltering under cover obviously reluctant to advance
towards their objective, Chipilly, which was on the left of the 4th Aus-
tralian Brigade. Heavy enfilading fire from a position south of the vil-
lage was hampering the Australian advance on that sector. To the
1C–4
suggestion of the two NCO's to follow the patrol who would lead the
way, the British company commander turned a deaf ear. The Austra-
lians then said they `would go it alone'. The British company com-
mander unsuccessfully endeavoured to dissuade them. Spreading
themselves out with intervals of twelve yards between each man, they
charged forward - the enemy opened fire but the wide front (about
sixty yards) enabled the patrol to reach the village unhurt. They sur-
rounded and captured a German post and took thirty prisoners. The
British then came up and these prisoners were handed over to them.
Then, showing the British how to attack defended localities, the dig-
gers led the British in a succession of rushes and captured post after
post of Germans and finally captured the spur from which the Ger-
mans were hampering the 4th Brigade's advance. A total of over 200
prisoners were taken in this action, they then returned to their own
lines.
Commentary
7. Both narratives illustrate what can be achieved when soldiers
use their initiative. In both cases the soldiers were aware of their supe-
riors' intentions. Realising that the German positions were interfering
OBSOLETE
with the advancing formations, thus delaying the offensive, they took
action to rectify the situation.
8. Narrative One. Time was of the essence. The sappers, realis-
ing this, did not seek direction from their superiors. Instead they as-
sessed the situation, formulated a course of action, and carried it out
aggressively. These speedy actions confused the Germans into surren-
der.
9. Narrative Two. The Australian patrol was undaunted by the
British company commander's lack of enthusiasm for their plan. They
were aware from their initial orders that Chipilly Village had to be se-
cured to allow their formation to continue unhindered. Again the situ-
ation did not allow time to seek direction or assistance from their
superiors. The soldiers used their initiative and accepted responsibil-
ity for the task. The initiative and daring displayed in the attack
proved to be decisive in securing the village. That an Australian bat-
talion commander should send six men to assist a British brigade for-
ward speaks volumes for the confidence that the Australians had in
their soldiers and the willingness of officers to delegate responsibility.
1C–5
Bibliography
C.E.W. Bean, Official History of Australia in the War of 1914 to
1918, Volume 6 The AIF in France 1918, Angus and Robertson,
Sydney, 1942.
C.E.W. Bean, ANZAC to Amiens, A Shorter History of the Aus-
tralian Fighting Services in the First World War, Australian War
Memorial, Canberra, 1968.
W.D. Joynt, VC, Saving the Channel Ports - 1918, Wren, North
Blackburn, 1975.
OBSOLETE
1C–6
OBSOLETE
1D–1
ANNEX D TO
CHAPTER 1
EQUIPMENT WEIGHT TABLE
Table 1-1. EQUIPMENT WEIGHT TABLE (1
WARNING:
Fromthefollowingtables,itisobviousthata soldiercan be
over-loaded. As a ruleof thumb,a soldiershouldcarryinto
battleno more thanone-thirdof hisbodyweightinequip -
ment and ancillaries.Commanders at alllevels mustbe
constantlyalertto thisproblem.
Dress or Weight
Cumulative
Serial Equipment Items (kg) Remarks
Total
Type (2) (3)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1. Personal Clothing 3.517 3.517 Incls

underclothing,
field dress,
boots,
OBSOLETE
sweatrag,
handkerchief.
2. Weapons SLR 4.300

and CES SLR sling 0.130
SLR bayonet 0.470
3 x SLR magazines 2.100 Filled
SLR cleaning kit 0.145
M16 2.950
M16 sling 0.075
10 x M16 magazines 4.250 Filled
M16 bayonet 0.438
M16 bipon 0.37
M16 cleaning kit 0.14 Incl bipod legs.
M203/M16 4.800
M203 cleaning kit 0.200
GPMG M60 10.430
GPMG M60 sling 0.510
GPMG M60 accessory ) Accessory bag
bag 1.190 ) and items
GPMG M60 spare 3.020 ) complete
barrel 0.232 ) weighs 5.172
GPMG M60 glove kg.
GPMG M60 cleaning 0.470 0.730
kit
GPMG M60 magazine 10.900
GPMG M60 cleaning 3.00
kit 0.730
GSMG MAG 58 10.900 Incl. sling
spare barrel 3.00
1D–2
Dress or Weight
Cumulative
Total
Type (2) (3)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
3. Basic or Web belt 0.342 ) Webbing

Patrol Harness H Type 0.382 ) complete
Order 2 x basic pouches 0.632 ) weight
Field pack (small) 0.375 ) 5.129 kg.
Case FAD 0.042 )
2 x water bottles 2.270 ) Full of water.
2 x water bottle carriers 0.380 )
2 x cups canteen 0.470 )
Rope assembly 9’ 0.152
Shell dressing 0.084
Camouflage cream 0.105
Ear protection 0.009
20 m cord 0.035
Black tape 0.070
Range card 0.015
Millbank filter 0.082
Anti mite 0.115
Insect repellent 0.115
1 x combat ration
pack (CRP) (24 hr) 1.370
Footpowder 0.092
OBSOLETE
Smock tropical 0.327
1 pair socks 0.075
Mattress (stretcher top) 0.312
Mattress Complete 0.600 Incl pneumatic
sections
Hexamine stove 0.115
Hexamine 0.192
Sandbag 0.190
Sub total 8.342 11.865
1D–3
Dress or Weight
Cumulative
Total
Type (2) (3)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
4. Marching Aust Pack (large) 1.730

Order 2 x water bottles and 2.650 Full of water.
carriers
Entrenching tool 1.730 Incl cover.
Sleeping bag 1.920
Shelter indiv 0.680
Mosquito net 0.375
Helmet 1.740 Scrimmed.
Pullover 0.860
Coat Olive Green 1.380
Shaving and boot
cleaning gear 0.600
2 x pkts hexamine 0.384
Dixies 0.407
KFS set 0.076
Housewife 0.046
2 x CRP (24 hr) 2.740
Trousers 0.710
Shirt 0.395
2 x handkerchiefs 0.032
Water bladder 3.250 Full of water.
OBSOLETE
Sub total 21.705 33.570
5. Ammunition 3 x SLR magazines 2.100 Filled.

10 x M16 magazines 4.250 Filled.
6 x 40 mm HEDP rds 1.320
7.62 mm lkd ball 100 2.250
rds 0.410
M26 grenade 0.670
No 83 Smk grenade 2.200
1 x 66 mm rocket 2.590
Anti-personnel weapon 0.640
M18A1 (Claymore) 0.600
complete
Trip flare
Signal illum
AL1
1D–4
Dress or Weight
Cumulative
Total
Type (2) (3)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
6. Section SLR magazine filler 0.070

Equipment Wire cutters 0.830
Compass 0.295
Map case, protractor
pens 0.300
Section medical kit 0.480
Torch 0.315
Machette 810 In cover
ANPRC 77 set 5.909 ) ANPRCC 77
Battery 1.153 ) set with
3’ antenna 0.440 ) battery and
10’ antenna 0.600 ) CES weighs
Accessory bag 0.305 ) 12.362 kg.
Harness 1.270 )
Handset 0.505 )
Antenna lightweight 2.180 )
Patrol Ambush Light 2.76 In satchel
ANPVS 4 3.8 (in case).
(6.5)
Platoon Early Warning TBA
System
OBSOLETE
Marker Panel Set 0.450 In case.
Binolculars 0.400
Notes:
1. Weights are approximate only.
2. Orders of dress are suggested only and will vary according to
unit SOPs.
3. Dry weight only.
4. Estimated weights for individuals in a section dressed in
Marching Order carrying 3 x CRPs, 800 rounds for the GPMG
M60, two grenades and other items (but not those listed in serial
6), varies from 43.755 - 50.947 kg, or an average of 47.302 kg.
2–1
CHAPTER 2
COMBAT SUPPORT
SECTION 2-1. INTRODUCTION
201. Rifle platoons will frequently be helped in their tasks by elements
of the battalion and other arms. Success in battle depends largely upon
cooperation between all supporting arms and services. This chapter
describes the combat support likely to be provided to rifle platoons by
support company, supporting arms, and air support. Those arms most
likely to support the rifle platoon are:
a. armour,
b. artillery,
c. engineers, and
d. army aviation.
OBSOLETE
SECTION 2-2. RIFLE COMPANY
202. Combat support will normally be provided to the rifle platoon, in
the first instance, by other elements of the rifle company, ie:
a. other rifle platoons, and
b. the support section.
203. Rifle platoons can engage the enemy using MGs, rifles, grenades
and anti-armour weapons out to a maximum effective range of 800 m. The
support section provides the company with immediate and intimate fire
support. The support section is equipped with two SRAAWs (84mm Carl
Gustav) capable of firing anti-tank, high explosive, smoke and
illuminating ammunition, and one MG which is held at company
headquarters. The SRAAWs are primarily anti-armour weapons but can
be used against personnel in the open and in bunkers.
204. Support from within the rifle company can be requested by the
platoons but will always be directed and coordinated by the company
commander. The company commander is responsible for requesting
support from support company, other arms and air support. He will be
assisted by the attached MFC and forward observer (FO), who will usually
control the fire support provided. The platoon commander may be
delegated this responsibility during independent platoon operations.
2–2
SECTION 2-3. SUPPORT COMPANY
General
205. The organisation of support company is shown in Annex A to
Chapter 1. The role of support company is to provide intimate support to
the battalion. The contribution made to the combat power of the battalion
by the support company specialist platoons, is described in MLW Two, Inf
Trg 1. 1, The Infantry Battalion, Chapter 2 and MLW Two Inf Trg 1. 3, The
Specialist Platoons.
Mortar Platoon
206. The role of the mortar platoon is to provide indirect fire support to
the infantry battalion. The mortar platoon is equipped with six mortars
and can operate as three independent sections of two mortars each; as a
platoon of four mortars and one independent section of two mortars; or as a
platoon of six mortars.
207. The types of mortar ammunition and fire are:
a. High Explosive (HE).
(1) HE ammunition can be fused as follows:
OBSOLETE
(a)
(b)
Point Detonating. The round detonates on im-
pact with the ground or objects such as trees.
Delay. The round penetrates to some extent be-
fore detonating, thus having a significant de-
structive effect on field defences and
installations.
(c) Proximity. The round detonates in the air. This
is very effective against troops in field defences
without overhead protection, armoured per-
sonnel carriers (APCs) which are not closed
down and troops in the open.
b. Smoke. Smoke rounds are primarily used for blinding enemy
observation posts (OPs), reducing the effectiveness of their
weapons and screening our own troops. Smoke can also be used
to aid observation of fire in difficult terrain, as a signal, and will
cause casualties due to the burning white phosphorus of the
round.
c. Illumination. The parachute illumination round produces an
excellent white light. It is valuable for illuminating assaulting
infantry and armour, and can be used in conjunction with other
types of ammunition.
2–3
208. The fire of the battalion mortars may support the rifle platoon in
the following ways:
a. Attack and Advance. In the attack and the advance, battalion
mortars may be used to:
(1) neutralise or destroy targets of opportunity;
(2) cover the movement of platoons and sections;
(3) illuminate the battlefield;
(4) support the reorganisation of the platoon and section on
the objective, by helping to break up enemy counter at-
tack. This is known as defensive fire (DF) and is dealt with
in the next sub-paragraph.
b. Defence and Withdrawal. In defence and withdrawal battalion
mortars may be used to:
(1) assist in breaking up an enemy attack. The company com-
mander will identify probable enemy forming up places
(FUPs), routes to the FUP and lines of approach. These
OBSOLETE
may be nominated as DF tasks and registered by all bat-
talion mortars within range of them. Platoon command-
ers may call for DF by means of pre-arranged signals,
radio or line. The DF tasks covering most likely enemy ap-
proaches may be nominated as DF final protective fire
(FPF) tasks, depending on the number of fire units avail-
able. Mortars, when not otherwise engaged, are laid on
the FPF task so that a call for fire on the most likely ap-
proach can be answered immediately;
(2) engage opportunity targets;
(3) neutralise targets;
(4) assist patrols by engaging targets of opportunity or by fir-
ing DF tasks. An MFC may accompany a patrol;
(5) illuminate the battlefield; and
(6) cover movement.
209. A detailed coverage of the tactical employment of mortars is
contained in the MLW Two, Inf Trg 5.2, Mortar Tactical Employment and
Fire Control. The characteristics of the battalion mortars are detailed in
the MLW Two, Inf Trg Vol 5 series of pamplets, and MLW Two, Inf Trg
2.2, Infantry Commanders Aide-Memoire.
2–4
210. Unless allocated an MFC, the platoon commander will request
mortar fire using the company net. The MFC is usually collocated with
company headquarters but may be tasked to support a platoon on an
independent task.
211. The MFC advises the commander and calls for, or adjusts fire in
accordance with, the request of that commander. If the MFC is
unavailable, any member of the battalion may call for fire using all arms
target grid procedure, as described in MLW Two, Inf Trg 5.2, Mortar
Tactical Employment and Fire Control, and MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.2,
Infantry Commanders Aide-Memoire.
Anti-armour Platoon
212. The role of the anti-armour platoon is to provide the infantry
battalion with the capability to defeat enemy armour and to destroy other
targets in the battalion area of operations (AO). The anti-armour platoon is
equipped with eight medium range anti-armour weapons (MRAAW) 106
mm Recoilless Rifle (RCL) and can operate as four independent sections
consisting of two detachments each with one MRAAW, as a platoon of
eight MRAAW, or any other combination.
OBSOLETE
213. The characteristics of the MRAAW and doctrine concerning its
tactical employment are detailed in the MLW Two, Inf Trg 6.3, The
MRAAW System, and MLW Two, Inf Trg 1.3, The Specialist Platoons.
214. Anti-armour platoon weapons will normally be centrally controlled
and will be deployed by the CO. He may place sections under command of
rifle companies but it is unlikely that he will place a section under
command of a rifle platoon. Anti-armour elements may be deployed in the
platoon defensive locations. The anti-armour platoon commander will
coordinate their siting with the company commander, and the platoon will
be tasked with providing local protection.
Assault Pioneer Platoon

215. The role of the assault pioneer platoon is to undertake a variety of
field engineering tasks to assist the battalion to fight, maintain mobility
and restrict the enemy's mobility. The platoon carries explosives, a variety
of hand tools, powered assault boats, power drilling, sawing and shovelling
equipment, and minefield breaching equipment.
216. The assault pioneer platoon will normally be centrally controlled
and deployed by the CO. He may place the platoon or sections under
command of a rifle company. When manpower is provided by rifle
companies, the assault pioneer platoon will provide specialist advice and
supervision. The platoon can give intimate support to the rifle company by:
2–5
a. assisting with the construction and breaching of obstacles;

b. operating engineer assault equipment;
c. destroying enemy bunkers;
d. constructing elementary tracks and roads;
e. constructing and maintaining dropping zones and helicopter
landing points or zones; and
f. assisting riflemen to dig-in, using explosives and digging equip-
ment.
217. The platoon is also trained to fight as a rifle platoon. Each section
has an MG.
Sustained Fire Machine Gun Platoon

218. The role of the sustained fire machine gun (SFMG) platoon is to
provide machine gun fire support to the battalion. The platoon is equipped
with six SFMGs which have an effective range of 2400 m. It can operate
either as three independent sections, each of two detachments of one gun;
as a platoon fire unit of six guns; or as a combination of these. Detachments
OBSOLETE
should not operate independently.
219. The employment of the SFMG platoon is explained in MLW Two,
Inf Trg 1.3, The Specialist Platoons. The characteristics of the SFMG and
GSMG are detailed in MLW Two, Inf Trg 4.8, The General Support
Machine Gun (GSMG).
220. SFMG fire is planned and coordinated at battalion level. The CO
will detail the tasks for the platoon and the platoon commander will be
responsible for the detailed siting of the guns. To do this he will liaise with
the company commanders to coordinate the SFMG fire and locations with
those of the company weapons. The platoon will usually be in support
rather than under command. If elements of the machine gun platoon are
deployed in a platoon defensive location, that platoon will be tasked with
providing local protection and the company will be responsible for their
administration.
221. Requests for machine gun fire can be sent:
a. from platoon to company over the company net, then from the
company to the battalion command post (CP) over the battalion
command net;
b. over the mortar or artillery net by an MFC or FO; or
c. over the battalion patrol net, if established, by patrols or OPs.
2–6
222. The procedure for requesting MG fire is described in the MLW
Two, Inf Trg 4.8. The General Support Machine Gun (GSMG).
Signals Platoon
223. The role of the signals platoon is to provide operational
communications for the command and control of the infantry battalion.
This can take the form of equipment only, or both operators and
equipment. The signals platoon is equipped with radios, both very high
frequency (VHF) and high frequency (HF). It holds sufficient
switchboards, field telephones and wire to establish battalion line
communications. A small reserve pool of signals equipment is held.
224. The characteristics of the equipment and doctrine concerning
the tactical employment of the signals platoon are detailed in MLW Two,
Inf Trg 1.3, The Specialist Platoons.
225. Platoon signallers are deployed by the regimental signals officer
(RSO) in accordance with the CO's requirements. Detachments are
allocated to battalion headquarters, all companies, administrative cells,
the CO and to specific tasks as required. Signallers are not usually
allocated below company level. Platoon signallers are rifleman trained in
OBSOLETE
the use of signals equipment.
226. The signals platoon MG is deployed as part of the battalion
headquarters local defence plan. A signaller's personal equipment is on the
same scale as a rifleman's. Specialist equipment will be allocated by the
RSO in accordance with the CO's plan.
SECTION 2-4. ARMOUR

General
227. The infantry platoon is most likely to work with the following
RAAC sub-units:
a. tank troop, and
b. APC section.
Tanks
228. The organisation of the tank squadron is detailed in MLW One 5.2,
Aide-Memoire. This pamphlet will explain what platoon and section
commanders must know to enable them to cooperate effectively with
tanks. For further information on the operations of tanks in support of
infantry read MLW Two, Armd Trg 1.4, The Tank Regiment in Support of
the Infantry Division.
2–7
229. Recognition. A tank is identified by the callsign painted on its
turret or hull. Within the tank squadron, troops are numbered from 1 to 4
and individual vehicles alphabetically, thus the vehicle callsigns on the
armoured radio net for 2 Troop A Squadron would be 12, 12A, 12B and
12C.
230. Fire and Movement. Fire and movement is an important factor
in tank tactics. A tank will not move unless it is supported by at least one
other tank from a static fire position.
231. Command and Control. Individual arms commanders are
responsible for the employment of their troops to provide the support
required. In addition to good radio communication, control will be
facilitated if the commanders move in close proximity to each other.
232. Movement. The major factors affecting tank movement are as
follows:
a. Tanks will always move from one position to another at their
best speed and must not be governed by the speed of the infan-
try.
b. When moving, tanks:
OBSOLETE
(1) make use of the best going and cover available;
(2) avoid crossing crests; and
(3) avoid moving in straight lines thereby avoiding present-
ing an easy target.
c. The distance between tank positions, or bounds, is governed by:
(1) ground,
(2) visibility, and
(3) the maximum effective range of the supporting tanks.
d. Tanks and infantry will often move on different axes.
233. Inter-communications at Platoon/Troop Level. The platoon
and the tank troop may communicate with each other by the following
means:
a. Radio. Radio can be used to speak to individual tanks or to the
troop on the company net. The monitoring facilities on the com-
mander's headset should enable him to communicate with the
infantry direct. The tank will use its normal callsign with the
prefix `Tango'.
2–8
b. Tank Telephone. The tank telephone is located in a box at the

rear of the tank hull. To talk to the tank commander, open the
box, pull out the handset on its spring cable and press the
buzzer button which is inside the box. Press the pressel switch
on the handset firmly before speaking. The telephone is con-
nected to the tank inter-communication circuit and the tank
commander will hear the buzzer whatever net he is on at the
time. The gunner can also reply to a call, and can tell the caller if
the tank commander is otherwise engaged. The user should
move clear of the rear of the tank to the extent of the cable as
soon as he withdraws the telephone from its box. Replace the
telephone and close the box after use.
WARNING:
If approaching the tank to use the tank telephone be
prepared for sudden rearward movement of the vehicle.
c. Personal Contact. Personal contact is the best method of com-

munication as it reduces misunderstanding.
d.
OBSOLETE
Visual Signals. A simple system of previously arranged sig-
nals, such as handsignals, coloured smoke, flares, tracer etc, is
sometimes an effective means of communication.
234. Tank/Target Indication. The methods used for infantry
tank/target indication are described in Annex A to this chapter.
235. Frontages. A troop will disperse to the limit at which control and
mutual fire support can be maintained. This is usually dictated by the type
of country. In open country a troop may operate on a frontage of about 1000
m. In close country the distance may be as little as 100 m, or even less.
236. Characteristics of Tanks. The characteristics of tank weapons
are detailed in the MLW Two, Armd Trg 3. 1, The Medium Battle Tank
(Leopard AS-1). The tactical characteristics of tanks are as follows:
a. Firepower. The main armament and machine gun of the tank
provide heavy, aimed, direct fire. The tank excels at:
(1) destructive fire against hard and pinpoint targets,
(2) close support for infantry, and
(3) quick engagement of opportunity targets.
2–9
b. Mobility. The cross country ability of the tank enables it to move

to a variety of fire positions, to avoid enemy observation and
fire, and to take quick evasive action.
c. Protection. Armour does not provide absolute protection
against attacks from all ranges and angles, but it affords a rea-
sonable chance of survival on the battlefield and allows a tank
to expose itself to mortars, light artillery and small-arms fire in
order to fire direct. Armour affords some protection against ra-
diation, biological and chemical agents.
d. Flexibility. Flexibility derives from the commander's ability to
exploit firepower, mobility and protection, to concentrate the
destructive power of his tanks.
237. Shock Action. Used boldly, employing the characteristics of tanks
to apply maximum firepower at unexpected times and places, tanks can
produce a shock effect on the enemy. Shock action will disrupt the enemy's
plans, destroy his cohesion, sap his morale and weaken his will to resist.
238. Limitations. Tanks are subject to the following limitations:
a. Dependence on Logistic Support and Servicing. An indication
OBSOLETE
of the requirement is given in MLW One 5.2, Aide-Memoire.
Tanks should receive replenishment as frequently as possible,
and the platoon commander must be prepared for this.
b. Vulnerability in Close Quarter Fighting. In close country, in-
cluding built-up areas, supporting infantry will usually be re-
quired to provide close protection, especially against SRAAWs.
Close country increases the tank's vulnerability because its mo-
bility and visibility are reduced.
c. Vulnerability to Air Attack. Tanks, particularly en masse, are
vulnerable to air attack.
d. Difficulty in Holding Ground. During daylight, in open coun-
try, tanks can hold or deny ground for limited periods. In close or
broken country, or if ground is to be held for extended periods,
infantry support is required.
e. Ground and Obstacles. Steep or very close country and difficult
going, limit the movement of tanks. Natural and artificial ob-
stacles, including minefields, may be a barrier to unassisted
tanks. Engineer assistance may be required if an obstacle is to
be breached.
2–10
f. Noise. Noise can prejudice surprise, but skilful driving or a

cover plan will reduce this limitation. Although the enemy can
hear our tanks, he may have difficulty identifying their num-
bers and direction. When tanks are deployed within an infantry
position, a higher level of noise must be expected as crews con-
duct essential maintenance, metals expand and contract and
gunnery power systems operate.
g. Darkness and Limited Visibility. In spite of aims to vision,
night and fog restrict visibility and reduce engagement ranges.
239. The types of tank ammunition and fire are:
a. High Explosive - Anti-tank (HEAT). The round is dual purpose.
It is used primarily to destroy armour, but can be used to de-
stroy or neutralise soft targets.
b. High Explosive - Squash Head (HESH). As for the HEAT round,
it is dual purpose, used primarily to defeat enemy armour, but is
very effective on other types of soft targets.
c. Armour Piercing - Discarding Sabot (APDS). This is a kinetic
energy round used to defeat enemy armour. Having no high ex-
OBSOLETE
plosive, it is of limited use against other types of targets.
d. Anti Personnel - Spintex. The round is fired from the tank's
main armament and is particularly effective against massed
troops in the open. It can be used to clear gaps through wire ob-
stacles. It is effective from muzzle action (MA) to 4400 m, using a
timed fuse.
e. Smoke. The smoke round is used as a tactical weapon, to cover
movement. The tank is not best suited to lay down large smoke
screens. The round will also cause casualties due to the burning
white phosphorus.
f. Machine Gun. The Leopard AS-1 tank is equipped with two
7.62mm machine guns; one coaxially mounted and another
used in the anti-aircraft role.
240. Tank Support. Tank support for infantry usually takes the
following forms:
a. Advance. During the advance, tanks can:
(1) protect the movement of advancing infantry and
(2) destroy minor opposition.
2–11
b. Attack. During the attack, tanks can:

(1) provide intimate direct fire support, particularly after in-
direct fire has been lifted;
(2) destroy enemy AFVs;
(3) dominate the objective and the areas forward, and to the
flanks to prevent the enemy from interfering with reor-
ganisation; and
(4) provide illumination.
c. Defence. In defence, tanks can:
(1) destroy enemy armour,
(2) provide intimate direct fire support from previously re-
connoitred positions,
(3) provide night observation and illumination, and
(4) support a counter-attack and counter penetration.
OBSOLETE
d. Withdrawal. During the withdrawal, tanks can:
(1) provide delaying action as a rear guard,
(2) counter-attack, and
(3) protect exposed flanks.
241. Tasks of the Infantry. When infantry are working with tanks
their tasks include:
a. seizing and holding ground;
b. the destruction of enemy SRAAWs. The closer the country, the
greater the importance of this protection;
c. the destruction of any weapons missed by the assaulting tanks;
and
d. the clearing of defiles, close country or urban terrain which
threatens the tank's security.
242. Battlecraft. The infantry/tank team must have standard
procedures for planning and launching operations. These must be
practised and known to all to obtain the smooth and swift cooperation
required in battle.
2–12
243. Marrying Up. The regrouping of units requires careful planning.
The following are the major planning considerations:
a. The selection of an area:
(1) large enough to prevent congestion of vehicles and person-
nel,
(2) secure from enemy ground interference,
(3) preferably out of range of enemy artillery, and
(4) accessible by sufficient trafficable routes.
b. Signposting of the area.
c. Provision of guides by the static unit.
d. Exchange of liaison officers (LOs).
e. Agreement to a plan which includes:
(1) vehicle/troop allocation;
(2) locations;
(3) communications; and
OBSOLETE
(4) coordinating details, including timings, routes, identifica-
tion and traffic control.
244. Once the marry up has been achieved, operating procedures and
general familiarisation training need to be completed:
a. Before Battle:
(1) Infantry and tank crews and commanders must get to
know each other.
(2) Each arm must have a knowledge of the characteristics of
the weapons, equipment and the limitations of the other.
(3) Planning for the battle is not done in isolation.
b. Essential Checks. No matter how limited the time, the following
must be completed:
(1) final check of communications;
(2) final check of reference points;
(3) check of responsibilities - tanks to infantry and infantry to
tanks; and
(4) check of all special signals to be used.
2–13
245. The Carriage of Infantry on Tanks. Infantry should only be
carried on tanks as a last resort. If carried, the following must apply:
a. Infantry must never ride on the leading tanks because:
(1) they are extremely vulnerable to enemy fire, and
(2) they will impede the immediate action capability of the
tank once contact has been made.
b. Platoon and section commanders must ensure that their sol-
diers:
(1) have practised mounting and dismounting drills. Under
no circumstances must individuals mount or dismount
without being ordered to do so;
(2) have practised emergency action to be taken in the event
of enemy air or ground attack;
(3) keep awake (exhaust fumes produce drowsiness);
(4) keep clear of exhaust pipes (they become hot);
OBSOLETE
(5) do not hang their legs over the side of tanks (they may be
crushed by trees or walls); and
(6) hold on securely to whatever hand holds are available.
APCs
246. The APC section is designed to carry an infantry platoon, providing
a degree of protection against small arms and automatic weapon fire,
anti-personnel obstacles and shell fragmentation. The organisation of the
APC troop together with vehicle data and weapon characteristics are
detailed in MLW One 5.2, Aide- Memoire.
247. Command and Control. When carrying infantry, APC units
normally operate under operational control of the infantry. The vehicle
commander controls the APC and its driver.
248. Communications. Each APC has one radio on the company net
and one primarily for squadron use. Fixed callsigns are painted on the
sides of the APC and the section numbering system is similar to the tank
troop.
249. Marrying Up. The requirement for marrying up is the same as for
tanks.
250. Debussing. An infantry section will debus to the right and/or left
of its APC, no further forward than the APC turret, facing in the same
2–14
direction as the vehicle. (Debussing drills must be rehearsed as part of the
preparation before battle.) The procedures vary depending on whether the
section is in or out of contact but the section should always debus in the
following order:
a. MG No 1,
b. 2IC,
c. MG No 2,
d. section commander, and
e. riflemen/scouts.
251. Embussing. Troops are to board the APC in reverse order to that
of debussing.
252. Mounted Formations. It must be expected that formations will
change regularly and rapidly. The four basic platoon mounted formations
(Figure 2.1) are:
a. Box. This formation is used when enemy contact is possible;
OBSOLETE
b. One Up. The One Up formation is used when enemy contact is
possible;
c. Line Ahead. Line Ahead formation is used when enemy contact
is unlikely; and
d. Line Abreast. Line Abreast is when contact has been made with
the enemy. Line abreast is ideal for assaulting an objective or
clearing an area.
253. Spacing. Because of the need to achieve mutual support, the
effective range of APC weapons regulates the spacing between vehicles.
Normal spacings for the platoon are:
a. Frontages. Frontages are not to exceed 300 m.
b. Depth. Depth is not to exceed 800 m.
2–15
11 11B
Direction of Movement
11A 11C
a. Box
11A
11 11B Direction of Movement
11C
b. One Up
11B
OBSOLETE
11C 11 11A Direction of Movement
c. Line Ahead
11B
11A 11 Direction of Movement
11C
d. Line Abreast
Figure 2-1. Platoon Mounted Formations
2–16
SECTION 2-5. ARTILLERY
General
254. Artillery can engage the enemy at longer ranges and with heavier
weapons than the infantry. For the infantry commander a knowledge of
what support the artillery can give him, and how he can obtain it, may
mean the difference between the success and failure of his mission, and the
life or death of his men.
Artillery Fire
255. The types of surface to surface artillery ammunition are as follows:
a. HE. HE ammunition can be fused as:
(1) Point Detonating (PD). Point detonating fusing produces
detonation on impact with the ground or objects such as
trees;
(2) Delay. Delay fusing allows ammunition to penetrate to
some extent before detonating, which has a significant de-
structive effect on field defences and installations; or
(3) Variable Time and Proximity. Variable time and proxim-
OBSOLETE
ity fusing produces detonation in the air. This is very effec-
tive against troops in field defences without overhead
protection, APCs not closed down and troops in the open.
b. Smoke. Smoke projectiles are used primarily for reducing the
effectiveness of enemy weapons or OPs by blinding the enemy
and screening the activities of our troops. Smoke can also be
used as an aid to observation, or as a signal. There are two types
of smoke projectiles, they are:
(1) Base Ejection (BE). BE is used for blinding or screening, as
an aid to observation office, or for signals; and
(2) White Phosphorus (WP)
. WP is used for screening and
also produces an incendiary effect which is capable of
causing casualties.
c. Illumination. The parachute illuminating round produces ex-
cellent white light to illuminate the battle field.
d. Anti-armour. The anti-armour projectiles to be used in the di-
rect fire role against armour and hard targets are:
(1) High Explosive Plastic With Tracer (HEP-T), and
(2) HESH.
2–17
e. Anti-Personnel. The anti-personnel projectiles to be used in the

direct fire role against personnel in the open are:
(1) fleshette, and
(2) cannister.
f. Carrier. Carrier projectiles can carry chemicals or propaganda
leaflets.
256. The characteristics of artillery weapons and ammunition are
detailed in MLW One 5.2, Aide-Memoire.
Artillery Tasks
257. The Attack. During the attack, artillery supports infantry
operations with:
a. Preparation Fire. Preparation fire is a brief but intense HE con-
centration; and
b. Covering Fire. Covering fire is HE and smoke to protect as-
saulting troops by neutralising enemy direct fire weapons and
OBSOLETE
OPs. This fire may be:
(1) on a timed programme, laid down in orders;
(2) at targets on call, which is fire at pre-arranged targets,
fired when called for; or
(3) at targets of opportunity.
258. Defence. Artillery can support infantry in the defence by
providing the following types of fire:
a. DF. DF disorganises enemy preparations for an attack or coun-
ter-attack and breaks up his assault. It may be divided into:
(1) counter preparation fire, to hit at enemy preparations and
reserves;
(2) close defensive fire, to hit the enemy in the FUP and dur-
ing the assault. Tasks should be reserved for likely enemy
approaches and those which the infantry and armour can-
not adequately cover; and
(3) FPF, the most vital DF task. Fire units can accept only one
FPF and will remain laid on it when not engaging the en-
emy.
b. Covering Fire. Covering fire in defence is used to support a
counter-attack and is the same as for the attack.
2–18
259. General. Other types of available fire which are not related to any
particular point in the battle are:
a. Counter-Battery. Counter-battery fire is HE fired to destroy or
neutralise enemy artillery or mortar positions. These missions
are usually controlled at brigade level.
b. Harassing. Harassing fire is observed or predicted fire in-
tended to disrupt enemy troop and vehicle movement, disturb
their rest, and lower their morale.
c. Smoke.
d. Illumination.
How to Get Artillery Support
260. Artillery fire is normally controlled by an FO, who has
communications on both the artillery, and the infantry nets. The FO is
normally allocated to a rifle company from the field battery which is ‘in
direct support'.
261. If an FO and party are allotted to assaulting companies in the
OBSOLETE
attack, they will assist the infantry by adjusting any pre-arranged fire
plans or engaging opportunity targets.
262. In defence FOs may be established in company or platoon locations,
or they may be located in static OPs which a rifle platoon may be tasked to
protect.
263. Artillery fire may also be controlled by an MFC or or by any officer
or non-commissioned officer. The standard artillery fire control procedure
is shown in Annex B to this chapter. The MFC will request artillery fire
support over the mortar firing net, whereas officers and non-commissioned
officers will request it through company headquarters on the company net.
Troop Safety
264. To make the best use of covering fire, infantry must move as close
to it as safety will permit. The safe distance depends on many factors eg
the calibre, range and position of the guns, the slope of the ground,
whether the troops are in APCs or not, the presence of trees around the
target and the type of ammunition in use. The FO should be consulted on
the safe distance before each mission, but the responsibility rests with the
infantry commander to decide how close he will go. Planning safety
distances are detailed in MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.2, Infantry Commanders
Aide-Memoire.
2–19
Fire Planning
265. A fire plan is the tactical plan for using all available weapons for
offensive and defensive support. Fire planning requires a detailed
knowledge of the characteristics of the weapons and of the physical and
logistics capabilities of those providing the support. The infantry
commander must prepare his fire plan in collaboration with his artillery
and/or support company advisers. It is important that artillery and/or
support company advisers take part in all planning from inception and
have the earliest information on any change which may affect the fire plan.
Shelling and Mortaring Reports (SHELREPS/MORTREPS)
266. SHELREPs and MORTREPs are reports of enemy shelling and
mortaring, containing information on the calibre, direction, time, density
and the area under bombardment.
267. The submission of SHELREPs and MORTREPS is the
responsibility of all arms. They provide a valuable source of artillery
intelligence. By themselves, they seldom provide the location of hostile
batteries, but they indicate which batteries are active, the areas to search
for new batteries, and the number and type of weapons.
OBSOLETE
268. SHELREPs and MORTREPs must be passed as quickly and as
often as possible. The format for these reports is contained in MLW One
5.1, Staff Duties in the Field, 1987.
SECTION 2-6. ENGINEERS

General
269. The work of combat engineers can contribute enormously to the
success of an operation. As there are seldom sufficient engineers to carry
out all the tasks required of them, higher commanders have to allot
priorities for engineer work. For many of their tasks the engineers require
heavy and bulky equipment. Engineer commanders need to know as much
as possible about probable future tasks to enable the right men, with the
right equipment, to be sent to the right place, at the right time. Infantry
commanders can help a great deal by promptly passing back accurate
engineer information.
270. Information is required on:
a. the state of roads, tracks and bridges (good as well as bad);
b. the types and location of mines encountered;
c. the width of streams, canals and other obstacles; and
2–20
d. local availability of engineer plant, and material-such as tim-

ber, steel, stone, gravel and sand.
271. The information should be reported in accordance with unit SOPs.
These SOPs should be based on Engineer Reports (ENGREPs) as detailed
in MLW Two, Engr Trg 1.2, Engineer Intelligence and Project
Management.
Engineer Tasks
272. The main tasks which engineers have to carry out it in the combat
zone (CZ) are those which maintain and improve our own mobility and
those which impede the enemy.
273. Improving the mobility of our own troops may include:
a. the opening of routes to enable men and vehicles to reach their
objectives by:
(1) construction, repair and maintenance of roads and tracks;
(2) crossing water obstacles by rafts, bridges and the develop-
ment of fording places;
OBSOLETE
(3) construction of entrance and exit points for amphibious
vehicles on water obstacles; and
(4) detecting, breaching and clearing minefields and other ar-
tificial obstacles;
b. the destruction of enemy defences and obstacles; and
c. the construction, repair and maintenance of airfields and the
preparation of landing sites for helicopters.
274. Impeding the enemy's mobility requires the production of an
obstacle plan. The plan is made by engineers in collaboration with the
tactical commander and his staff so that it complements the tactical plan.
The obstacle plan must take full account of natural obstacles and will
include the addition of artificial obstacles, using anti-tank minefields,
demolitions, craters etc, either to link the natural obstacles together or to
make them more difficult to cross. In addition to completing the obstacle
plan, engineers help to impede the enemy in the following ways:
a. Preparation of Defensive Positions. Although the infantry are
responsible for their own defences, engineers assist in their
preparation with the use of mechanical digging equipment and
the provision of defence stores and advice as required.
AL1
2–21
b. Denial. Denial measures may include the destruction of mili-

tary stocks of food, fuel, equipment and facilities, and the re-
moval or contamination of valuable resources.
275. Other tasks which the engineers may have to undertake in the CZ
include:
a. Water Supply. Engineers are responsible for the supply of
drinkable water.
b. Lighting. Engineer responsibilities include the provision of
lighting and power to formation headquarters.
c. Camouflage. Engineers have a responsibility to assist in any
major camouflage projects.
d. Explosive Ordnance Disposal (EOD). Engineers also have the
responsibility for the detection, neutralisation and, where nec-
essary, final disposal of unexploded missiles.
Cooperation
276. There will frequently be parties of engineers working in the
OBSOLETE
forward areas. Whenever there are engineers in the company area, contact
should be made with them and information exchanged with their
commander. The platoon or section may also be directed to give assistance
to the engineer party.
Further Information
277. The roles, organisations, characteristics and tasks of engineer units
are described in MLW Two, Engr Trg 1.1, Employment of Engineers.
SECTION 2-7. AVIATION

General
278. The Army Aviation Corps provides infantry with the following
support:
a. reconnaissance and surveillance,
b. observation of fire,
c. assistance in command and liaison, and
d. limited movement of men and materiel.
2–22
Reconnaissance and Surveillance
279. Reconnaissance sorties are flown to obtain detailed and specific
information. When ordering a reconnaissance mission the following must
be considered:
a. Time should be allowed for a detailed map reconnaissance, and
for planning the conduct of the mission.
b. The pilot must be provided with information on the location of
both friendly forces and known or suspected enemy forces, par-
ticularly air defence locations.
c. Vegetation will have a marked effect on the success of a recon-
naissance mission. Dense vegetation is more difficult to see
through and requires the aircraft to fly slowly at tree top level,
reducing the effectiveness of observation and increasing the
vulnerability of the aircraft.
280. Surveillance sorties are flown as part of an overall plan for
systematic observation of a particular area or point, to detect change.
Army Aviation can provide visual, electronic or photographic surveillance
for these missions.
OBSOLETE
Observation of Fire
281. Observation of fire tasks include:
a. target acquisition;
b. adjusting indirect fire of artillery, mortars, naval guns and ar-
moured fighting vehicles (AFVs); and
c. forward air control of ground attack aircraft.
Assistance in Command and Liaison
282. The increased mobility provided by helicopters can greatly assist
commanders and their staff. Helicopters can be used for transport, or as
temporary airborne command posts.
283. LOs can be carried rapidly by air and the aircraft can provide an
efficient air dispatch service.
284. Army aircraft, particularly helicopters, can assist in traffic control.
In a low level conflict they may be employed as voice aircraft for crowd
control or for dropping leaflets, CS grenades or for illumination.
285. Army aircraft are equipped to carry out automatic radio
retransmission and can be equipped to undertake electronic warfare
operations.
2–23
286. All Army aircraft are equipped with VHF and UHF homing
facilities. These facilities home in on radio transmissions, and are
particularly useful when the pilot is required to locate troops on the
ground, or when troops on the ground are unsure of their position.
287. Army aircraft can be used to lift small parties of men or carry small
quantities of stores. All Army helicopters can be equipped to evacuate
casualties.
Further Information
288. More detailed information on the employment of Army Aviation is
provided in MLW Two, Avn Trg 1.1, The Employment of Army Aviation
and MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.2, Infantry Commanders Aide-Memoire. The
latter pamphlet also describes the requirements for landing points and
airstrips, aircraft marshalling signals, the procedure for requesting Army
Aviation support, advice on briefing and debriefing of pilots and notes for
passengers.
SECTION 2-8. AIR SUPPORT

General
OBSOLETE
289. Air support is considered in detail in MLW One 1.8, Air Support.
290. In addition to the provision of offensive air support, aircraft may be
the primary means of providing mobility on the battlefield, resupply, and
evacuation of casualties. All ranks must be trained to operate with aircraft.
This section describes the air support likely to be encountered at platoon
level.
Close Air Support
291. Close air support (CAIRS) is air action against hostile targets
which are close to friendly forces. CAIRS missions will not normally be
directed against targets which can be engaged effectively by
surface-to-surface weapons. CAIRS can be used to kill the enemy in both
attack and defence, and is particularly effective against troops in the open
and against armour.
292. To ensure that friendly positions are not mistaken for the enemy, a
clear indication of the friendly and/or enemy positions must be given. Any
of the following methods may be used to identify targets:
a. Give the degree bearing and distance from the observer, or use
the clock ray method incorporating easily identifiable natural
features or north bearing (to indicate 12 o'clock) and the dis-
tance.
2–24
b. Mark the target directly by smoke, rockets, artillery or mortar

fire. Smoke colours for identifying targets are prescribed by for-
mation headquarters.
293. CAIRS requests initiated by a platoon are passed by company
headquarters to battalion headquarters on the command net. Battalion
headquarters will check the request and, if approved, send it to higher
headquarters.
Aerial Reconnaissance and Surveillance
294. Aerial reconnaissance and surveillance is used to provide
information for the commander by use of visual, electronic or photographic
means. This support for the platoon is provided primarily by Army Aviation
but on some occasions RAAF aircraft may be used. Aerial reconnaissance
and surveillance may be:
a. Visual. Visual surveillance involves pilot or observer reports of
details seen.
b. Photographic. Photographic surveillance results in the provi-
sion of photographs of the area. Such photographs are normally
OBSOLETE
made available to the platoon command; or
c. Electronic. Electronic reconnaissance and surveillance involves
the use of sensors which are used to obtain information about the
enemy. The RAAF is responsible for processing, interpreting and
disseminating all information produce from sensor reconnais-
sance.
295. Detail about the provision of aerial reconnaissance by Army
Aviation is contained in MLW Two, Avn Trg 1.3, Conduct of Missions.
Resupply by Air
296. Air resupply may be by:
a. landing by fixed wing or rotary wing aircraft,
b. dropping by parachute, or
c. free dropping.
297. Commanders must know the requirements for the dimensions and
marking of landing sites and the selection and marking of dropping zones.
Aircraft characteristics and performances together with the requirements
for landing sites and dropping zones are detailed in MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.2,
Infantry Commanders Aide-Memoire.
2–25
Air Movement
298. A platoon will frequently be moved by Service aircraft, especially
rotary wing aircraft. Drills for emplaning and deplaning are detailed in
MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.1, The Infantry Soldiers Handbook.
Aeromedical Evacuation
299. Aeromedical evacuation by utility helicopter or transport aircraft
permits much earlier treatment of casualties. Evacuation by fixed wing
aircraft will normally be restricted to rear areas where landing strips have
been constructed. Helicopters normally evacuate from the vicinity of
Regimental Aid Posts (RAP) but may evacuate from forward companies
and long patrols, if the tactical situation permits. The request for forward
aeromedical evacuation (DUSTOFF) must be sent on the command net.
The format of the DUSTOFF request is detailed in unit SOPs.
Annexes: A. Infantry/Tank Target Indication
B. Artillery and Mortar Target Grid Procedures
OBSOLETE
2–26
OBSOLETE
2A–1
ANNEX A TO
CHAPTER 2
INFANTRY/TANK TARGET INDICATION
Sequence of Target Indication
1. The term infantry/tank target indication covers any method by
which infantry can indicate targets to tanks. The procedure for getting
the task commander to see and engage the target quickly is to:
a. attract the tank commander's attention;
b. get him looking in the right direction;
c. give the range from the tank to the target;
d. describe the target;
e. give the tank commander an executive order; and
f. if the target is not immediately seen, correct the tank's fire until
the tank commander sees the target.
Attracting Attention
2.
a. OBSOLETE
Attracting the tank commander's attention can be done by:
offering the target on radio, eg `TANGO 23 THIS IS INDIA 21,
TARGET OVER';
b. telling the tank commander by radio that the infantry com-
mander will come to his tank to direct him personally, or to use
the tank telephone;
c. using the tank telephone; or
d. using field signals.
WARNING:
If approaching the tank to use the tank telephone, be
prepared for sudden rearward movement of the vehicle.
Indicating Direction
3. The methods of indicating the right direction to the tank com-
mander are as follows:
a. Reference Points. Reference points may be either pre-arranged
or hasty. The reference point method is used in open country
and, when time allows, pre-arranged reference points are
agreed. Hasty reference points can be conspicuous features.
2A–2
b. Gun Barrel of the Tank. The gun barrel method (Figure 2-2 ) is
mainly used in close country. Whichever direction the barrel is
pointing is taken as 12 o'clock.
12
OBSOLETE
3
6
Figure 2-2. Target Indication - Gun Barrel Method

2A–3
c. Axis of Hull or Axis of Advance. The axis system (Figure 2-3 ) is

similar to the gun barrel system except that in this case the hull
or the axis of advance is taken as 12 o'clock. If the infantryman
is using the tank telephone, the axis of the hull method will be
the simplest.
12
9 OBSOLETE 3
Figure 2-3. Axis of Hull or Axis of Advance

2A–4
d. Fire Shot for Reference. The shot for reference method has many
variations. It is usually used in conjunction with the methods
described in sub-paragraphs b and c. The infantry commander
may request `FIRE SHOT (main armament) (or BURST (MG)
FOR REFERENCE' or he may indicate the target himself by
firing a shot (7.62 tracer, a burst from the MG, or an HE grenade
from the grenade launcher) and instructing the tank, `FIRING
SHOT/BURST /GRENADE FOR REFERENCE'. Once the fall
of shot is identified, corrections are made onto the target.
Range
4. Either the range from the tank to the target or the grid refer-
ence of the target must be given. The former is preferable for close
country and the latter in open country at longer ranges.
Description of Target
5. The tank commander must be told what the target is so that he
can select the most appropriate ammunition with which to engage it.
Executive Order
OBSOLETE
6. The infantryman tells the tank commander what he wants
done to the target. Normally this will be:
a. destroy, or
b. neutralise.
7. If the target is to be neutralised, the infantryman should indi-
cate the time for which the target is to be neutralised and what he in-
tends doing next, eg, ‘NEUTRALISE FOR 10 MINUTES AT MY
COMMAND - I AM MOVING AROUND THE RIGHT FLANK.'
Correction of Tank Fire
8. The crew commander may fail to identify the target or may en-
gage the wrong target. If this occurs the infantryman will use the pre-
vious fall of shot to correct, or give another description of the target.
9. Corrections must always be made from the infantry point of
view. In open country when correcting fire onto targets at longer
ranges, the infantryman should use the normal artillery system of line
corrections; eg, `GO LEFT ... METRES' followed by corrections `ADD'
or `DROP'. To assist the crew commander, the infantryman must re-
port his position to the tank; eg, ‘I AM POSITIONED ABOUT 300
METRES TO YOUR LEFT IN THE TREE LINE'.
2A–5
10. Correction of fire in close country may be conducted by simple
commands such as, ‘LEFT/RIGHT/ADD/DROP.... METRES'.
Continuous Calling Method - Poor Visibility
11. The continuous calling method is used when the tank com-
mander cannot see a pinpoint target because of thick vegetation.
12. The coaxial MG is used to range onto the target and then the
tank engages with its main armament. The infantry commander may
not be able to see the tank, but he must have an accurate idea of its po-
sition, either from the noise of its engine and armament, or from direc-
tions given by other infantrymen in the platoon.
13. The following order is given to the tank commander: ‘AXIS OF
ADVANCE - 10 O'CLOCK - 50 - FIRE BURST FOR REFERENCE
AND I'LL START CALLING', or the tank commander may request the
infantryman to, ‘START CALLING'.
14. As soon as the infantryman identifies the burst on the ground,
he starts to call corrections. If the fall of shot is LEFT he calls ‘RIGHT'
and continues to do so until a burst falls to the RIGHT of the target
and then he calls ‘LEFT' until he brackets the target. Similarly, if the
OBSOLETE
fall of shot is high or low he calls ‘ADD' or ‘DROP' until he achieves a
hit on the target.
2A–6
OBSOLETE
2B–1
ANNEX B TO
CHAPTER 2
ARTILLERY AND MORTAR TARGET GRID PROCEDURES
General
1. The procedures outlined in this section are applicable to the
control of both mortar and artillery fire. A section will not normally
have an MFC or an artillery FO attached, but fire support can be ob-
tained by contacting the MFC, FO or company commander. All offi-
cers and NCOs should be trained in target grid procedure (TGP).
Information Required from Observer
2. If a target is to be engaged by someone other than a trained ob-
server with direct contact to the fire unit, the following information is
required:
a. observer's identification,
b. warning order,
c. location of target,
OBSOLETE
d. description of target,
e. method of engagement, and
f. method of fire and control.
3. Observer's Identification. Normal radiotelephone proce-
dure is used, using allocated callsigns. The only exception is that all
transmissions are read back in full. (This applies to all TGP).
4. Warning Order. The order `FIRE MISSION' is the warning
order. The selection of the number of guns to engage the target should
be left to trained observers or to the controlling authority.
5. Location of Target. To enable the correct calculations to be
made at the gun or mortar line, the direction (grid bearing from the ob-
server to the target) should always be included when giving the loca-
tion of a target. The location of a target may be indicated in one of the
following ways:
a. By a Grid Reference. The observer gives the grid reference of the
target and direction from him to the target, eg, ‘GRID 123456,
DIRECTION 1240'.
b. By a Target Number or Reference Object. The target number is
that of a previously recorded target. The reference object is one
which is known to both the observer and the fire unit. Examples
are:
2B–2
(1) ‘TARGET ZT 1242, DIRECTION 1240'.
(2) ‘CONCRETE BRIDGE, DIRECTION 1240'.
c. By a Target Grid Correction from a Recorded Target or from a
Reference Object. When a target is located near-a previously re-
corded target or a reference object, the information given in
sub-paragraph b is given, together with the required target grid
correction from the recorded target or reference object (the di-
rection is to the new target). This method Should only be used
when the new target is within 500 Metres of the recorded target
or reference object. Examples are:
(1) ‘TARGET ZT 1242, DIRECTION 1300, RIGHT 400,
DROP 200'.
(2) ‘CONCRETE BRIDGE, DIRECTION 1180, LEFT 200,
ADD 400'.
6. Description of Target. The description of the target should be
brief, but sufficiently informative to enable the determination of the
importance of the target and the best method of engagement. The ob-
server should state the approximate number of personnel, weapons,
vehicle etc, the size of the area covered by the target and the degree of
protection . Examples are as follows:
a.
b.
c.
OBSOLETE
‘50 INFANTRY AND 3 TANKS IN OPEN, 200 BY 200'.
‘60 INFANTRY DIGGING IN ALONG RIDGE LINE'.
‘20 VEHICLES IN WOOD, 300 BY 300'.
7. Method of Engagement. The method of engagement of the
target includes:
a. Type of Engagement. This indicates to the forward observer any
special procedures. If the type of engagement is not given, the
convention is that an area neutralisation mission is required.
Other types of engagements which may be ordered are:
(1) ‘REGISTRATION'- a single gun target to record accurate
firing data for possible future use; and
(2) ‘DANGER CLOSE' - when the target is close to our own
troops (within 550 metres).
b. Ammunition. This element gives the type of ammunition re-
quired. If ammunition other than HE with PD fuse is required,
either during adjustment and/or fire for effect, it must be speci-
fied separately. Orders for shell are given as ‘HE', ‘ILLUMI-
NATING', ‘WP', or ‘SMOKE' (including colour, if other than
white). The orders for fuse are given as ‘VT' (artillery - variable
time) or ‘PROX' (mortars - proximity). Unless stated the fuse
used will be PD.
2B–3
8. Method of Fire and Control. The method of fire and control
includes elements which indicate the control to be exercised by the ob-
server over:
a. whether adjustment is to be carried out, or fire delivered with-
out adjustment;
b. the method of fire; and
c. the time of delivery of fire.
9. The orders to be used for fire and control are:
a. ‘ADJUST FIRE'. ‘ADJUST FIRE'is used when fire is to be ad-
justed by the observer. If more than one gun/mortar is required,
the order`........(number of guns/mortars) ‘ADJUST FIRE',
must be given. This order may be prefixed by ‘AT MY COM-
MAND';
b. ‘FIREFOR EFFECT. ‘FIRE FOR EFFECT' is used by the ob-
server when he wishes the target to be engaged without adjust-
ment, or when he is satisfied that the adjustment process has
been satisfactorily completed; eg, after his report of ‘TARGET'.
c. OBSOLETE
This order may be prefixed by ‘AT MY COMMAND';
‘AT MY COMMAND ... FIRE'. ‘AT MY COMMAND' is used
when the observer wishes to control the moment of firing for
any reason. The order ‘FIRE' is given when the fire unit has re-
ported ‘READY' and the observer wishes it to fire. ‘AT MY
COMMAND' is cancelled by ‘CANCEL AT MY COMMAND';
and
d. ‘CHECK FIRING'. ‘CHECK FIRING' means stop firing imme-
diately. ‘CHECK FIRING' is cancelled by ‘CANCEL CHECK
FIRING' from the originator.
Target Grid Corrections
10. Line Corrections. Fire must always be corrected onto an
imaginary line drawn from the observer through the target (line OT).
Correction orders are detailed in Table 2-1. They indicate whether the
round is over (beyond the target) or short (the observer's side of the
target) as seen by the observer looking along the line OT. Unless the
guns are firing over the head of the observer it will usually be prefera-
ble to visualise the line OT as a lane having some width, because the
length of the beaten zone of the gun is much greater than its width.
The observer should not give a line correction, after the initial line cor-
2B–4
rection, except on the evidence of two or more rounds. To assist in ob-
taining an accurate correction to bring the next round onto the line
OT, the angle between the first round and the line OT should be mea-
sured with the graticules of the binoculars, or with the hand. Having
measured this angle and knowing the approximate distance observer
to target, the correction necessary can be calculated by using the
sub-tension rule ‘one mil at 1000 units subtends one unit'. For exam-
ple, if the observer is 2000 m from the target and he observes a round
failing 100 mils to the right of the line OT, his correction will be ‘LEFT
200' (100 x 2 = 200). Line corrections may be ordered to the nearest 10
m.
TABLE 2-1. TARGET GRID CORRECTIONS
Position of Burst in Relation to

Serial Correction
the Line OT on Target
(a) (b) (c)
1. Right of line OT ‘LEFT .........’

2. Left of line OT ‘RIGHT .........’
3.
4.
5. OBSOLETE
Beyond the target
Short of the target
On the target
‘ADD .........’
‘ADD .........’
‘TARGET .........’
11. Bracketing. As soon as a round bursts on or near the line OT,

the observer should correct along this line. Because it is not possible to
measure accurately how far over, or short of the target a round may be,
a process of bracketing is used. This consists of getting an opening long
bracket of 400 or 800 m (two rounds separated by this amount falling
over and short of the target) and subsequently splitting this bracket
progressively until a short bracket of 100 m is obtained. A correction of
‘ADD 800', if it produces a bracket, should be followed by ‘DROP 400'.
If this round falls short, the next correction should be ‘ADD 200' and so
on. As soon as a 100 m bracket is obtained the observer orders ‘ADD
OR DROP 50. TARGET'. Should the target be hit before adjustment
is completed the observer will immediately report ‘TARGET' and no
further correction will be necessary. An example of the process of ad-
justment is given in Figure 2-4 and Table 2-2.
2B–5
T"
e "O
Lin
5 X
X
Target (T)
OBSOLETE
X
2 1
X
X
m
2000
Observer (O)
Figure 2-4. Adjustment of Fire

2B–6
TABLE 2-2. EXAMPLE OF THE PROCESS OF ADJUSTMENT
Round Observation Correction
(a) (b) (c)
1. Right 100 mils ‘LEFT 200’

2. Short ‘ADD 400’
3. Over ‘DROP 200’
4. Short ‘ADD 100’
5. Over ‘DROP 50 TARGET’
12. At any time the FO may take over the fire mission and carry out
the engagement using the report ‘TARGET IDENTIFIED'.
OBSOLETE
3–1
CHAPTER 3
INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION 3-1. TACTICAL INFORMATION
General
301. Any plan made by a commander in the field must be based on all
the information at his disposal. The more accurate and complete the
information the more likely the plan is to succeed.
302. In battle, forward platoons are a most important source of
information to a company or battalion commander. They keep him
constantly informed of enemy activities and the nature of the country in
front of the forward defended localities, or over which the company or
battalion is moving. Commanders at all levels may base their plans and
operations, sometimes wholly, on the information provided by forward
platoons.
303. Despite all the other calls on their time and attention, platoon and
section commanders must send back tactical information as a matter of
OBSOLETE
urgency. They must also remember that information needs to flow both
ways and must keep their men informed of the situation.
Information Required
304. During operations, information is required from the forward troops
on:
a. the enemy,
b. friendly forces, and
c. the ground.
305. The Enemy. The company or battalion commander will want to
know the answers to the following questions about the enemy:
a. Who is he?
b. Where is he?
c. What has he got and how many?
d. What is he doing and how is he doing it?
e. What is he likely to do and how is he likely to do it?
306. Friendly Forces. A commander must, at all times, have the
following information concerning his troops:
3–2
a. Where are they?

b. How far have they been able to get?
c. What are the troops on their flanks doing?
d. What are their losses in men and equipment?
e. What is their present fighting state?
307. The Ground. So that he may decide upon the best use of troops
and equipment, a commander will want to know the following about the
ground:
a. What is the ‘going'like? (Density and type of vegetation, type of
surface, suitability for movement).
b. What obstacles, natural or artificial are there? How can they be
overcome?
c. Is the existing map accurate? Are any corrections necessary?
d. What is the condition of roads and tracks?
e. How wide and deep are the streams? How fast do they flow?
OBSOLETE
f. What open areas exist? How large are they?
g. What are the areas of tactical importance?
Obtaining Information
308. The information required by commanders will sometimes be
readily available to the forward troops, but often they will have to take
special steps to secure it. There will always be a requirement for the unit to
organise a patrol programme which includes fighting and reconnaissance
patrols, setting up OP and any other measure deemed necessary. Full use
of all the senses and skills in patrolling and tracking will be necessary.
More detail is contained in MLW Two, Inf Trg 3.3, Patrolling and
Tracking.
309. Prisoners of war and captured documents and equipment are
valuable sources of information. The interrogation of prisoners,
examination of equipment and translation of documents are the
responsibility of trained personnel. Prisoners and captured articles must
be sent to company headquarters immediately after capture for movement
back to battalion headquarters. The quicker information is extracted, the
quicker it can be used to advantage.
310. Negative Information. Negative information, such as the
absence of the enemy from a given area, is also of great value. Forward
troops should not fail to report even the most trivial item of information
concerning the enemy. It is from these many small items from all over the
battalion area that a picture of the enemy's strength and intentions can be
drawn. Keen observation and an enquiring mind are required.
3–3
SECTION 3-2. REPORTING
General
311. It is important to pass information back accurately and promptly.
A patrol diary will greatly assist accuracy of detail on long patrols.
312. Messages used to report information must have the following
characteristics:
a. Accuracy. Such details as grid references, figures, dates and
times must be carefully checked before the message is sent. If
the observer cannot be certain of numbers, use the word ‘ESTI-
MATED'.
b. Brevity. Provided it is clear, the shorter the message the better.
Leave out unnecessary words. In written messages, use only
common abbreviations and write legibly.
c. Clarity. There must be no doubt about the meaning. ‘ENEMY
TANKS TO MY FRONT'may mean a squadron of enemy tanks
advancing or two enemy tanks stationary. Be precise.
313. In verbal and written reports, the following points must be
OBSOLETE
included:
a. The time of the event or observation.
b. The source of the information. Answers to one or more of the fol-
lowing questions are needed:
(1) Who saw it?
(2) Where was it when he saw it?
(3) Who heard it?
(4) Where did he hear it?
(5) From whom did he hear it?
c. The place at which the event happened, eg, grid reference or es-
timated distance and direction from a known or easily recognis-
able point.
Method of Reporting
314. Verbal Reports. In some circumstances information may be
passed personally to the next higher commander. In this way any queries
can be answered and misunderstandings cleared up on the spot. Details
can be pointed out on the ground, on a map or on an improvised model, and
the enemy cannot intercept the message.
3–4
315. Reports by Radio and Telephone. Reports will frequently be
sent by radio or field telephone. When using either radio or telephone,
strict attention must be paid to security. Details of the message format for
most reports are included in MLW One 5.1, Staff Duties in the Field and
should be included in unit SOPs.
316. Written Messages. When a verbal report cannot be made, or a
message is too long to be remembered by an orderly, a written message is
required. If possible, send written messages on the standard message
forms. If these are not available any paper may be used. The requirements
for message writing are detailed in MLW One 5.1, Staff Duties in the Field.
317. Verbal Messages by Runner. This is the least satisfactory way
of passing information as misunderstandings can easily occur. Even a
simple message may be distorted. Verbal messages should always be
short, and the sender of the message should:
a. pick a reliable man to take it;
b. think it out carefully so that he can give it to the messenger
without hesitation;
c. give it slowly and clearly; and
d.
OBSOLETE
after a pause, make the messenger repeat it twice to ensure that
he has memorised it, correctly.
SECTION 3-3. COMMUNICATIONS WITHIN THE RIFLE
COMPANY
General
318. Communications between company headquarters, the rifle
platoons and any attached troops of the battalion or supporting arms may
be by:
a. radio,
b. line,
c. personal contact,
d. runner, or
e. light signals and smoke.
Radio
319. Radio is the primary means of communicating between the
company commander and his platoons. Company headquarters will man
radios on battalion nets and the company internal net. A standard radio
diagram for the rifle company command net is shown in Annex A to this
chapter.
3–5
320. Rifle Platoon. The platoon radio will be carried and operated by a
rifleman who is a trained and qualified signaller. All soldiers in the platoon
should be trained to set up and use the platoon radio, and correctly send
and receive simple messages. The procedure to be used for radio
communication is detailed in MLW Two, Sig Trg 2.3, Radio Telephone
Procedure. The basis for training in radio communications is provided in
MLW Two, Sig Trg 2.2, Radio Communications.
321. Antennas. Radio operators and platoon and section commanders
must know how to operate the radio equipment they are likely to use, and
how to use the power of the set most effectively. All radio stations should
erect the most efficient antenna possible and should be prepared to relay
traffic if necessary. These aspects of radio communications are described in
MLW Two, Sig Trg 2.2, Radio Communications.
322. Siting. In siting the platoon radio, which will normally be VHF,
users and operators must remember that the position of the radio is critical
for good communications. When siting VHF radios, the following general
points should be borne in mind:
a. a line-of-sight transmission path is ideal;
OBSOLETE
b. the set should be as high as possible;
c. a move of a few metres will often restore communications;
d. avoid placing the set in front of a reflecting object such as a cliff,
building, water tank, or metal bridge; and
e. avoid sources of electrical interference and power lines.
323. The signals platoon maintains a reserve of VHF radios which can
be issued to rifle companies for OP parties, standing patrols or other
detachments from the platoons or company.
324. In addition to the VHF radio set normally used by platoons, a pool
of HF radio sets is held by the signal platoon for use when long range
communications are required. Company headquarters are issued an HF
radio as an alternative means of communications on the battalion
command net.
Line
325. Sufficient line stores, including a switchboard, are carried within
company headquarters to enable line communications to be established
within the company area. On occasions, line communications may also be
established between platoon headquarters and sentry positions, OPs and
standing patrols. Line can be cut by shelling and tracked vehicles. Burying
3–6
or suspending line off the ground will reduce the chance of cutting. Line
should be duplicated on a different route so that if one line is broken the
alternative can still be used.
Personal Contact
326. Personal contact is the best method by which commanders at all
levels can pass orders or information to their subordinates. Detailed
briefings can be given and the commander can ensure that his
subordinates understand. He can also pass written material or equipment
at the same time.
Runner
327. A runner may sometimes be used to carry messages when radio or
line communication is not possible, or when the message is long. A platoon
commander relies a great deal on his runner for communications with his
sections as he will not normally have radio communications with them.
Light and Smoke Signals
328. The use of light and smoke signals is restricted by security
considerations and the range of colours available. They can also be
OBSOLETE
confused with enemy and other light signals or other flares. They are
normally used:
a. to indicate success, for example, in the assault or on successful
arrival at a destination;
b. to indicate the start of a part of an operation;
c. for calling down artillery or mortar fire; or
d. in conjunction with radio to indicate targets or the location of
positions to supporting aircraft.
Communications Within the Platoon
329. Additional methods of communication within the platoon are:
a. field signals,
b. whistle,
c. communication cord, and
d. expedient signals.
3–7
330. Field Signals. With practice, a remarkable amount of
information can be passed by means of field signals. They are often the
best means of control and have the advantage of being silent. The standard
signals are shown in MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.1, The Infantry Soldiers
Handbook.
331. Whistle. Blasts on a whistle are an effective and simple method of
communication between the platoon commander and his section
commanders but, like voice control, should only be used when noise is
acceptable. They are best used to attract attention and then used in
conjunction with another means such as field signals. Whistles may be
particularly useful in the night attack.
332. Communication Cord. In defence, a good method of
communication between the platoon commander and his section
commanders is to connect their fire trenches with string or cord. Signals
are given by a series of tugs indicating certain action. This method can also
be used effectively between the section commander and the machine gun
pit or sentry post and in ambushes, between groups. Sufficient strong cord
should always be carried within the platoon to provide communication
cords.
OBSOLETE
333. Expedient Signals. Expedient signals consist of all special
methods and devices used to transmit commands or information. All
signals must be understood and rehearsed before their use. During
training and in operations, platoons may develop or utilise expedient
signalling devices such as:
a. Flags. Flags can be used very effectively, especially in mounted
operations, to send pre-arranged signals over long distances;
and
b. Mirrors. Mirrors can be a very effective means of sending sig-
nals.
SECTION 3-4. SECURITY OF INFORMATION

General
334. It is the responsibility of every soldier to make sure that the
enemy's task of collecting information about friendly troops is made as
difficult as possible.
Enemy Sources of Information in the Field
335. Enemy sources of information in the field and the methods of
preventing him from utilising these sources are shown in Table 3-1.
3–8
TABLE 3-1. COUNTERING ENEMY INFORMATION SOURCES
Serial Source Counter
(a) (b) (c)

1. Reconnaissance and Aggressive patrolling,
surveillance, ground camouflage, concealment
and air. fieldcraft and deception.
2. Interrogation of our Training of personnel in their
troops taken prisoner. duties if captured (Section 5-7).
3. Interception of our Strict adherence to correct radio
radio or telephone and telephone procedure
communications. /security measures (paragraph
336). Reduce use to a minimum.
4. Captured documents. Control over the distribution of
maps and documents.
Collection, before going into
operations, of official
OBSOLETE
documents, diaries, notes and
similar identifying material,
which are secured until return.
All waste paper must be burnt
(Section 5-7)
5. Careless talk. Instruction on the dangers of
discussing projected moves and
operations, in speculation on
the same subjects, and passing
on rumours.
6. Letters. Instruction to all ranks on what
may or may not be mentioned
in letters.
7. Refuse. Destruction and concealment of
all refuse, particularly during
mobile operations and on
patrols (Section 5-8).
3–9
Serial Source Counter
(a) (b) (c)

8. Civilian and refugees. Alerting troops to the fact that
the enemy will use local
inhabitants and refugees as
informers and agents. These
people should be handled
tactfully, yet firmly, in
accordance with orders
relating to them.
9. Animals. Alert the troops that
animals can be used to
disclose wire, booby traps,
trip flares, anti-personnel
minefields and to
neutralise sensor devices.
Radio and Telephone Security
OBSOLETE
336. Radio. Every transmission by radio is liable to interception by the
enemy, even beyond the normal range of the radio. The information gained
in this way will supplement that received from other sources and may
enable enemy intelligence to discover our dispositions and to deduce our
plans for battle. Correct use of codes, changing of frequencies and callsigns,
and reporting of breaches in security are essential procedures for
maintaining communications security. The rules of radio telephone
(RATEL) procedure must always be adhered to by operators and users.
RATEL procedure is prescribed in MLW Two, Sig Trg 2.3, Radio
Telephone Procedure.
337. Telephone. The enemy can tap telephone lines without
interfering with the line. The rules of RATEL procedure must therefore be
adhered to by all users of telephone equipment.
Annex: A. Standard Radio Diagram for the Rifle Company
3–10
OBSOLETE
3A–1
ANNEX A TO
CHAPTER 3
STANDARD RADIO DIAGRAM FOR THE RIFLE COMPANY
77 77
12 13
(2Pl) (3Pl)
77 77
OBSOLETE
ll
11 she
Nut MS)
(1Pl) (CQ
Coy HQ
Notes:
1. This net's callsigns belong to A Coy (Callsign One). For B Coy platoons
callsigns would be 21, 22, 23 and 20, similarly for C and D Coys.
2. Manned by company orderly/signaller.
3. Link to Bn HQ manned by signal platoon detachment complete with their

radios.
4. Company radio stores allocation is:

a. 6 x ANPRC 77 sets complete (1 spare)
b. 1 x Antenna RC 292
5. Typical company line equipment is:

a. 5 x telephone sets K
b. 1 x Switchboard 993 GT
c. 1 x dispenser of telephone cable (805 m)
3A–2
OBSOLETE
4–1
CHAPTER 4
LEADERSHIP
SECTION 4-1. LEADERSHIP IN BATTLE
General
401. Leadership is described in detail in MLW Three 2.1, Leadership.
This chapter will deal briefly with leadership in battle and command and
control at platoon level.
402. Leadership is the art of influencing and directing men so as to
obtain their willing obedience, confidence, respect and loyal cooperation.
The outcome of most battles depends upon leadership — especially the
leadership of platoon and section commanders.
403. In battle, the platoon and section commanders must be aware of
the stress under which men will be, and how this may influence their
soldiers' actions in both the short and long term. Under fire, they must
realise that some soldiers may sit in the bottom of their pits and not use
their weapons for instance. Commanders must identify the problems
OBSOLETE
quickly and take resolute and effective action.
404. The qualities which distinguish a leader from other men are
courage, willpower, initiative, knowledge and, probably above all,
unselfishness. The foundations of leadership must be laid long before the
battle begins.
Discipline
405. Military discipline is a combination of imposed discipline and self
discipline. Imposed discipline is designed to introduce the standards of
obedience and behaviour that are demanded in battle. As the soldiers
develop through training and experience they learn to discipline
themselves, and it is this self discipline that will determine the outcome of
battle.
406. Discipline is a state of mind that produces a readiness for willing
and intelligent obedience. In battle there must be the highest degree of
discipline as it enables a soldier to carry out orders efficiently and quickly
and rely on others to do the same. The aim of military discipline is to
produce technically skilled, self-reliant, self-disciplined soldiers, working
together as members of a team.
407. The standard of discipline in the platoon will reflect the standard of
leadership. A good leader will ensure that a state of mutual respect exists
4–2
between himself and his men. He must ensure that each man has
developed sufficient self control. He must have pride in his job, in himself
and in his team, and faith in the leader. He must obey willingly any order
he is given, or do whatever is necessary to achieve the platoon and section
mission in the absence of further orders.
Morale
408. The morale of the soldier is the greatest single factor in war. Morale
is founded on discipline, leadership and self respect. It is the degree of
confidence a soldier feels in himself, in his leaders, in his group, in his
profession and in his ability to overcome all obstacles. When both
individual and team morale are high, the sub-unit and the individuals are
much more likely to survive the rigours of combat.
The Leader
409. Leading in battle is not fundamentally different from leading in
other circumstances - the team must be led to accomplish its task effectively
and efficiently. In battle, the effectiveness of the team depends on its
ability to meet the additional challenging stresses and demands of the
combat environment. The impact of two major causes of stress on
OBSOLETE
operations, fear and fatigue are described in MLW Three 2.1, Leadership.
The platoon commander must set the example and ensure that his section
commanders understand the effects of fear and fatigue in battle and how to
minimise them.
410. Platoon Commander. A platoon commander's chief means of
control are voice, whistle, radio and the use of field or special signals. He
must position himself where he can use them most effectively. Although
personal presence and voice predominate in an infantry battle, the platoon
commander may have to rely on the radio. The platoon commander should
position himself where he can see the whole battle area, where he can
direct and influence the battle, and where people can get to him. The
platoon commander is not another rifleman and should not, except in a
crisis, get himself involved in the firefight.
411. Section Commander. In battle the section commander will
position himself where he can lead his section and inspire his men by
example. In an attack, he will probably control his section best by
positioning himself in the centre and slightly ahead. There will be
occasions when, in order to direct his section best and make full use of his
fire power, he will position himself level with, or even to the rear of his
section.
RESTRICTED
5–1
CHAPTER 5
ADMINISTRATION
501. Sound administration is an element of command and is essential
for the maintenance of efficiency and high morale. The main
administrative considerations at platoon level are:
a. resupply of combat supplies;
b. supply of essential stores for a particular operation;
c. replacement or repair of weapons, equipment and clothing;
d. medical care and evacuation of casualties;
e. reception of reinforcements;
f. welfare of soldiers;
g. the handling of enemy prisoners;
h. health and hygiene; and
i.
OBSOLETE
burial of the dead.
502. All of these matters are the direct concern of the platoon
commander, platoon sergeant and section commanders.
503. The administrative organisations of the infantry battalion are
described in MLW Two, Inf Trg 1.1, The Infantry Battalion.
SECTION 5-2. PLATOON COMMANDER'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
General
504. The platoon commander is responsible for the administration of his
platoon, both in barracks and in the field. Even though he may delegate
certain routine administrative tasks to his platoon sergeant and section
commanders, he alone is responsible for ensuring that these tasks have
been correctly carried out, and that his platoon is fit for battle.
Platoon Commander's Notebook
505. It is essential that the platoon commander maintains a personal
notebook containing detailed information to allow him to appreciate the
capabilities and limitations of each man. Basic details should be entered as
soon as the man joins the platoon and comments added regularly.
5–2
506. On active service there should be two books:
a. The first, a small, waterproof book, contains the bare essentials
for use during field training and in action, for instance:
(1) number, rank, name and initials;
(2) date of birth;
(3) religion;
(4) blood group;
(5) weapon number; and
(6) size of boots and basic clothing items.
b. The second book should be stiff-backed and loose-leafed. It
should contain at least three pages relating to each man, one re-
cording his military history and qualifications , one recording his
family and next of kin details, and the other recording regularly
entered confidential facts and opinions on the soldier's perfor-
mance. The platoon sergeant and the section commanders
should be consulted to assist in maintaining these records.
OBSOLETE
The Resupply System
SECTION 5-3. RESUPPLY
507. The resupply system for platoons is based on daily maintenance for
combat supplies (ammunition, rations and packaged water). The provision
of other commodities is on demand, either on a routine or a priority basis.
508. Routine Demands. Non-operationally urgent demands are
requested as a maintenance demand (MAINTDEM). MAINTDEMS for
the following day are normally passed to the CQMS or his representative
during the daily maintenance.
509. Priority Demands. Priority maintenance demands
(PRIMAINTDEMS) may be requested by radio and will take precedence
over routine demands. The items will be delivered as soon as they are
available by the next available means.
510. Operational Demands. Urgently required items that are
necessary for continued operations are requested by radio as operational
demands (OPDEM). The items will be delivered as soon as they are
available by the fastest possible means.
5–3
511. Details of the message forms for MAINTDEM, PRIMAINTDEM
and OPDEM should be included in unit SOPs.
Ammunition
512. Each member of the platoon carries a given amount of ammunition
for his weapon. This amount should be detailed in unit SOPs.
513. When a platoon requires more ammunition, it should be brought
forward from the battalion holdings during routine resupply. The
battalion's holdings are referred to as first line ammunition.
514. The CSM holds an immediate reserve of all types of ammunition
for the platoons and the amount held is normally detailed in unit SOPs.
The CSM will issue his holdings only in an emergency when the battalion
holdings cannot be sent forward.
515. The RSM will normally hold a company's worth of ammunition and
this will similarly be issued in an emergency when the battalion's holdings
cannot be sent forward.
Water
516. Provision of water to platoons will be the subject of orders from
OBSOLETE
battalion and company headquarters. One or more of the following may
apply:
a. Collection of water may be by platoons from an approved local
source. Such water must be filtered and sterilised using the
Millbank filter and tablets carried by each soldier.
b. Soldiers may be required to collect rain water falling directly
onto individual shelters or into suitable containers.
c. Water may be delivered from a battalion or company water
point. Such water must be purified by filtration and disinfec-
tion.
d. Delivery of water may be from an engineer water point. Such
water will already have been purified.
517. If water is scarce or likely to be scarce, careful control of its
distribution and the holding of a reserve are necessary. Water is time
consuming to collect and heavy to carry. Replenishment must be planned.
518. It will often be necessary to provide protection for section or platoon
water parties as natural water sources are likely sites for enemy ambush.
5–4
Rations
519. There are five types of rations:
a. fresh rations or canned equivalent,
b. 10 man combat rations,
c. 24 hour ration packs,
d. individual meal combat ration, and
e. emergency combat ration.
520. Fresh rations or canned equivalent are issued whenever possible
and may be cooked centrally by company cooks, or on a platoon or section
basis. Centralised cooking reduces waste but because of restrictions, such
as the tactical situation or deployment, will usually only be delivered at
night.
521. The 10 man combat ration pack is designed to feed 10 men for one
day and may be cooked in the same way as fresh rations.
522. The 24-hour individual ration pack is designed for issue over
periods of up to six weeks, usually during mobile operation. 24-hour
OBSOLETE
rations are nutritious and designed to be eaten hot or cold.
523. The individual meal combat ration is a self-contained meal for one
man and is used when no other form of ration is practicable
524. Each man carries an emergency combat ration to be eaten only on
the orders of his platoon or section commander. Emergency combat rations
should not be eaten simply because one scheduled meal does not arrive.
When deciding whether to eat the combat ration, the commander must
consider the physical well-being of his soldiers, the likelihood of future
resupply and the availability of food from local sources.
525. Whatever the type of rationing, the food is received in the battalion
by the quartermaster platoon and either distributed in hot boxes or
divided into company lots for collection by the CQMSs or their
representatives. They distribute it to platoons as either prepared food or as
rations. Distribution to sections is normally arranged by the platoon
sergeant. The aim, whatever the circumstances or ration type available,
should be to produce two hot meals each day, in the morning and at night
and a midday cold snack.
Other Stores
526. Platoon requirements include stores such as:
a. oil and cleaning materials for weapons;
5–5
b. replacement weapons and spare parts;

c. defence stores such as wire, pickets, sandbags and revetting
materials;
d. replacement boots, equipment and clothing;
e. fuel, when cooking is on a platoon basis, and additional
hexamine tablets for individual cooking;
f. spare radio batteries; and
g. tools and other equipments as required.
527. The platoon sergeant, having collated section needs, obtains these
items through the CQMS by the procedure described in paragraphs 507 to
511.
528. The Echelon Bag System. The echelon bag system is normally
used when the unit is in the field. Each soldier is permitted to have an
echelon bag containing items required on a periodic basis, during lulls in
operations, and rest periods. Typical items are clean uniforms, toiletry
articles, spare socks, underclothes, boots and other personal items.
OBSOLETE
Echelon bags are held in sub-unit groups, usually at B echelon, and called
forward as required. Unit SOPs often dictate items to be included.
Resupply by Air
529. Resupply by air is discussed in Section 2-8.
SECTION 5-4. BATTLE CASUALTIES

First Aid
530. An important factor in maintaining a soldier's morale is the
knowledge that, should he be wounded, his comrades are sufficiently
trained to care for him. Within the company every soldier must have a
basic knowledge of first aid. This should include:
a. use of shell dressing,
b. how to treat burns,
c. how to give artificial respiration,
d. how to stop bleeding,
e. how to deal with shock, and
f. how to recognise and deal with illness caused by exposure to
harsh weather conditions.
5–6
531. The essentials of first aid are as follows:
a. a free free airway.
Save Life. Stopbleedingandmaintain
b. Prevent Condition Becoming Worse. Treatforshock,immobilise
fractures and cover wounds.
c. Relieve Pain. Use of splints and dressings.
d. Prevent Further Wounding. Get casualties to a safe place and
mark the location so that stretcher bearers can locate them.
532. The emergency care and treatment of the injured and sick is
detailed in MLW Two, Med and Dent Trg 3.1, First Aid and MLW Two, Inf
Trg 2. 1, The Infantry Soldiers Handbook.
Evacuation
533. Evacuation From the Platoon Location. If a casualty is able to
walk he will move back to the company aid post (CAP). If he is a stretcher
case, company headquarters should be asked to provide stretcher bearers.
Where they are not available, the platoon sergeant should arrange for the
casualties to be carried back on improvised stretchers. Casualties may be
OBSOLETE
collected from the platoon or company location by helicopter or ambulance
and taken directly to the RAP or to rear medical units for treatment. A
casualty being evacuated from the platoon is to take his rifle, a few rounds
of ammunition and his personal equipment. No other weapons, such as
MGs, SRAAWs, mines, grenade launcher, or controlled stores, are to be
taken.
534. CAP. A medical assistant from the medical platoon will usually
establish the CAP. He will check the first aid given to the patient and
prepare casualties for movement to the battalion RAP or, under some
circumstances, further to the rear.
535. Evacuation to the RAP. Casualties will usually reach the RAP:
a. by walking,
b. carried by stretcher bearers attached to companies, or
c. collected by stretcher bearers or an ambulance from the RAP.
536. RAP. At the RAP, the regimental medical officer (RMO) will
ascertain the condition of the casualties and allocate a priority for
evacuation. Casualties will then be given treatment to prepare them for
further evacuation to medical units. The casualty's rifle and personal
equipment will remain with him during his evacuation. Any ammunition
will be removed before the casualty leaves the RAP.
5–7
Enemy and Civilian Casualties

537. Enemy and civilian casualties are to be afforded the same medical
treatment as friendly casualties and are to be evacuated from the CZ by
the same means. There is to be no discrimination between friendly, enemy
and civilian casualties.
538. Enemy casualties should be searched before first aid treatment and
the following must be confiscated:
a. arms, ammunition and personal web equipment;
b. compasses;
c. binoculars; and
d. papers and equipment.
Burials
539. It is equally important for the sake of morale that all burials are
conducted with dignity and without delay. A chaplain should conduct
them, but where this is not possible they should be conducted by an officer.
OBSOLETE
540. In operations, it will be rare for more than an emergency burial to
take place either at the point of contact or after evacuation to the rear.
Care must be taken to ensure that the grave is properly marked. It must
also be recorded with an eight figure grid reference. All documentation
must be completed in accordance with current administrative orders so
that subsequent relocation and reinterment can occur. Detailed
requirements should be included in unit SOPs.
541. If the burial is not to take place in the platoon locality, company
headquarters is to arrange for the body to be removed as soon as possible.
SECTION 5-5. REINFORCEMENTS

General
542. On arrival in the theatre of operations, reinforcements are held at
the reinforcement holding unit (RHU) where they are acclimatised and
trained before being posted to the battalion. Some reinforcements will
behe held inA echelon.As casualties
usually occur,thereinforcements
willbe
moved forward to join their new platoons and replaced by troops from the
RHU.
543. When a new member joins the platoon he should be briefed by the
platoon commander on the situation and the routine within the platoon.
Once allotted to a section, the section commander must assist him to fit
5–8
into the team as quickly as possible. Ideally, reinforcements should be
allotted to units between operations or during quiet periods, to give them
time to adjust to their new environment. Platoon and section commanders
must be aware that a reinforcement, especially one without combat
experience, will be under more severe stress in a combat situation than the
remainder of the platoon.
SECTION 5-6. WELFARE

544. No commander must lose sight of the fact that good welfare is a
major contributory factor to good morale.
545. Chaplains. A good chaplain, whatever his denomination, is
invaluable. He should be assisted in every way possible to bring spiritual
and material comfort to soldiers. His presence can assist the wounded and
badly shocked by providing comfort and reassurance.
546. Mail. One of the most important single contributions to good
morale is the regular arrival and departure of mail. Mail to and from
troops on operations is passed through the daily maintenance system. The
platoon sergeant must ensure that all outgoing mail is collected and
dispatched daily and that all incoming mail is distributed promptly.
OBSOLETE
547. News and Briefings. In war, personal and local problems tend to
assume undue importance. Regular briefings on the battle situation and
the provision of newspapers, news bulletins and battalion news letters,
keep everyone in touch with the general situation and keep local problems
in perspective.
548. Pay. Poor pay administration will have an adverse effect on
morale. On operations, the main considerations are that:
a. soldiers receive sufficient money in the field to meet their needs,
b. allowances and remittances to dependants be paid promptly,
and
c. platoon commanders have sufficient knowledge about pay ad-
ministration to be able to give immediate advice on matters
such as allotments and remittances.
549. Amenities. Platoon commanders must guard against boredom
when soldiers are not actually fighting or working. Ready access to
amenities such as libraries, motion pictures and sporting facilities will do
much to alleviate this boredom.
5–9
SECTION 5-7. PRISONERS OF WAR
Conduct If Taken Prisoner
550. It is the responsibility of every commander to prepare his men for
war. This preparation would be incomplete unless each man is fully
conversant with his rights and duties if taken prisoner, and is aware of the
psychological effects of being captured. This topic is covered in detail in
MLW Two, Inf Trg 1.1, The Infantry Soldiers Handbook.
Enemy Prisoners
551. Speed is essential in handling and passing back prisoners of war.
Platoon and section commanders must ensure that prisoners are disarmed
immediately and searched to prevent the destruction of equipment or
documents. The following actions are then to be carried out:
a. All personal equipment, documents and detachable insignia
are to be removed and placed in a suitable receptacle. They are
labelled to associate them with a particular prisoner, place and
date/time of capture and capturing unit.
b. Officers, political officers, NCOs and other ranks, males and fe-
OBSOLETE
males, are separated. Talking and smoking are forbidden.
c. Time and place of capture are reported to company headquar-
ters, if possible at the time of capture.
d. Prisoners are sent back to company headquarters under guard,
the strength of the escort depending on the number and condi-
tion of the prisoners. The escort will take any captured equip-
ment and documents with them. Walking wounded may be
used as prisoner escorts, however, they must be fully capable of
carrying out the task.
e. Prisoners can be used to carry stretcher cases.
f. Enemy wounded will be treated in the same way as our own.
SECTION 5-8. HEALTH AND HYGIENE

552. Casualties, caused by sickness and disease can out-number battle
casualties in operations. Good hygiene is the greatest single contributor to
a high standard of health. The RMO and his medical assistants are
available to advise on hygiene matters, but the platoon commander is
responsible for the health and hygiene of his platoon.
5–10
553. Ablutions. Regular washing is esssential for good health.
Twenty-five litres of water per day per person for all purposes is considered
to be the minimum. Often it is not possible to issue this amount during
operations, so very strict individual and collective water economy may be
necessary.
554. Latrines. Latrines must be sited and dug as soon as possible. The
hole should be no more than 30 cm wide, at least 1 m long and not less than
1 m deep. Earth from the hole is piled behind and a tin provided as a scoop
so that each man may cover his motion with earth after using the latrine.
A fire trench should be dug nearby to protect anyone caught in the open by
enemy fire. Latrines should be:
a. sited 20-30 m downwind;
b. located in the shade, especially in the tropics;
c. in cover, such as on reverse slopes, or in hollows, or scrub;
d. within the platoon perimeter;
e. at least 50 m from waterpoints and in such a position that they
cannot drain towards the waterpoint; and
f.
OBSOLETE
filled in when no longer required.
555. Urinals. Urinals require equally careful siting to ensure that they
will be used in preference to the ground around the position. The pit should
be at least 30 cm deep and the bottom should be covered with leaves and
twigs. Urinals should not be sited within 50 m of a water point and should
be filled in when no longer required.
556. Refuse. Visible refuse advertises troops' presence from air and
ground, and is bad for hygiene as it encourages flies and rats. All refuse
must be burnt and the residue buried in a refuse pit which is filled in when
it is no longer required. Tins must be flattened before being buried. Ideally,
there should be a refuse pit per section of 0.6 x 0.6 x 1.3 m. Many animals,
particularly pigs, root up refuse, so shallow pits are useless. In certain
circumstances, eg in protracted defence, backloading may be preferable.
557. Water. Coupled with the conservation of water, water discipline
includes the necessity for every man to drink water to keep himself fit.
This is particularly important in the heat where dehydration can cause
collapse. It has been estimated that as much as 20 litres per man per day
could be needed in certain conditions of climate and activity. Infected and
unclean water is a carrier of disease and Millbank filter bags and water
sterilising tablets must be used if there is any doubt about the cleanliness
of the water supply.
5–11
558. Personal Hygiene. Cleanliness helps to protect the body against
diseases, but cleanliness alone is not enough. By failing to take precautions
against disease, or by drinking unsterilised water, a person who is
scrupulously clean bodily, may yet endanger his health and life. Strict
compliance with all rules and instructions for the protection of health is the
only way to avoid diseases. The following points must be kept in mind:
a. Feet should be washed, dried and, if possible, powdered each
day.
b. The opportunity to have a bath should not be neglected.
c. Socks should be changed regularly and kept well darned.
d. Boots should be pliable and in good repair and, although well
fitting, must allow room for some toe movement and expansion
of the foot.
e. Nails should be kept short and clean.
f. Teeth should be cleaned at least once daily.
g. Hands should be washed before eating and after every visit to
OBSOLETE
the latrine.
h. Shaving should occur at least daily.
i. Sun bathing is beneficial but must be very carefully controlled
as sunburn is debilitating.
j. Clothing, sleeping bag liners etc must be washed regularly,
aired and inspected for bugs and infestation.
k. Mess tins and eating utensils must be carefully cleaned after
use.
l. Body inspections, especially foot inspections, should be carried
out regularly by both regimental and medical officers. This is an
essential part of a regimental officer's duty and should not be
delegated entirely to medical officers and orderlies.
559. Health and hygiene is described in detail in MLW Two, Med and
Dent Trg 2.1, Preventive Medicine.
560. Fitness. Fit men are able to fight better and remain healthy longer
than unfit men. Keeping himself and his men fully fit is an essential task
of the platoon commander. Battle fitness requires endurance and mental
toughness. A programme of battle PT must be designed and followed.
5–12
561. Fatigue. Fatigue will be an ever-present factor affecting a soldier's
performance, regardless of his degree of fitness, morale and training.
Platoon and section commanders must continually be aware of this
problem, particularly in themselves. Although the effects of fatigue are
lessened by physical fitness, the ability to perform mental tasks (make an
appreciation or a decision, or prepare navigation data) will be affected.
562. Work loads must be shared and the commander must take care not
to over-use one soldier, section or platoon. The same scouts should not be
used all the time or the strain will quickly wear down their performance.
Load carrying must be spread amongst the section(s). If night activity is
heavy, troops must, wherever possible, rest during the day. Rest should be
taken whenever the situation permits.
OBSOLETE
6–1
PART TWO - BATTLECRAFT

CHAPTER 6
TACTICAL FORMATIONS AND CONTACT DRILLS
601. Section formations are used when the section is moving tactically.
They save time in tactical movement and assist in achieving control and
security. They serve as the basis of tactical teamwork upon which more
advanced infantry section tactics depend. In selecting a section formation,
the commander must consider the following factors:
a. The Ground, Terrain and Vegetation. Some formations are best
suited to close country or to night movement, while others are
better for open country and allow a wider search pattern.
b. The Enemy. The direction from which enemy contact is ex-
pected and the form of that contact will influence the formation
adopted. Some formations are better able to produce maximum
OBSOLETE
firepower to the front and should be used in an assault or ad-
vance to contact, if possible. Other formations provide better
firepower to the flanks and may be used to counter enemy am-
bushes, or to provide protection to another party.
c. Control. The section commander must maintain control. He
must select the formation that best allows him to control the
movement and firepower of the whole section.
SECTION 6-2. SECTION FORMATIONS
General
602. Each individual must know his location in the formation relative to
the other members of the section and the section commander. Each soldier
covers a set arc of responsibility for observation as the section is moving.
These arcs of observation must be pre-determined. To provide the section
with all-round protection they must interlock.
603. The section formation will be altered as necessary by the section
commander while the section is moving. The distance between men will be
determined by the task, the nature of the threat, the closeness of the
country, and by the visibility. As a general rule, the section should be
dispersed up to the limit of control, thereby allowing a wide area to be
covered and making the section less vulnerable to enemy ground and air
attack, and its movement less easy to detect.
6–2
604. The basic section formations are:
a. single file,
b. staggered file,
c. open file,
d. arrowhead, and
e. extended line.
605. Single file. The single file formation (Figure 6-1) is useful for
following narrow features such as creeks, minefield lanes and narrow
tracks in close country or by night:
a. Advantages:
(1) good control and speed,
(2) least vulnerable to fire from a flank, and
(3) good for night movement.
b. Disadvantages:
(1) poor firepower to the front, and
OBSOLETE
(2) vulnerable to frontal fire.
Scout Group Section Gun Group Rifle Group

Commander
Direction of Advance
Figure 6-1. Single File

6–3
606. Staggered File. Staggered file (Figure 6-2 ) may be used when the
path is wide enough to permit alternate men to move on opposite sides of it.
It is good for ridge and track clearance and for administrative moves along
a cleared road:
a. Advantages:
(1) good firepower to the flanks,
(2) good control in relatively close country, and
(3) suitable for night movement.
b. Disadvantages:
(1) covers a narrow front,
(2) vulnerable to frontal fire,
(3) presents a concentrated target, and
(4) splits the section group.
OBSOLETE
SCOUT GROUP SECT COMD MG GROUP RIFLE GROUP
DIRECTION OF ADVANCE
Figure 6-2. Staggered File
607. Open File. Open file (Figure 6-3 ) may be used when the path
made by the scouts is wide enough to permit alternate men to move on
both sides of it (as for staggered file).
a. Advantages:
(1) good firepower to the flanks,
6–4
(2) good control in relatively close country,
(3) suitable for night movement, and
(4) contact drill positions easily reached.
b. Disadvantages:
(1) covers a narrow front,
(2) vulnerable to frontal fire, and
(3) presents a concentrated target.
SCOUT GROUP MG GROUP
SECT COMD
OBSOLETE
DIRECTION OF ADVANCE
RIFLE GROUP
Figure 6-3. Open File
608. Arrowhead. The arrowhead formation (Figure 6-4 ) is best for

moving on a broad front in open country by day:
a. Advantages:
(1) less vulnerable to frontal fire,
(2) good for firepower to the front,
(3) good for crossing open country,
(4) contact drill positions easily reached, and
(5) it clears more ground.
6–5
b. Disadvantages:
(1) control is more difficult than other formations,
(2) vulnerable to flanking fire, and
(3) very difficult for night movement.
DIRECTION
OF
ADVANCE
SCOUT GROUP
TACTICAL
BOUND
OBSOLETE
RIFLE GROUP
SECT
COMD
MG GROUP
Figure 6-4. Arrowhead
609. Extended Line. Extended line (Figure 6-5 ) is an assault

formation:
a. Advantages:
(1) best formation for final assault, and
(2) very good for firepower to the front and for bayonet fight-
ing.
b. Disadvantages:
(1) control is difficult, and
(2) most vulnerable to flanking fire.
6–6
ENEMY
DIRECTION OF
ADVANCE
SECT COMD
OBSOLETE
Figure 6-5. Extended Line.
SECTION 6-3. PLATOON FORMATIONS

General
610. Platoon formations are used when the platoon is moving tactically.
The selection of a platoon formation will depend mainly on the task and on
the need for control.
611. Task. The platoon task will often dictate the formation to be used.
When advancing against an unlocated enemy, the platoon commander will
wish to keep the bulk of the platoon out of the immediate fire fight to
enable him to manoeuvre and destroy the enemy when their position is
located. In the assault, the platoon commander will try to bring the
maximum strength onto the objective.
612. Control. The needfor controlwill influencethe selectionof the
formation and the spacing between sections. The platoons' commander
must ensurethatno part of his platoonis ever beyondthe potential
support of some other part.
6–7
Basic Formations
613. There are three basic formations for a platoon. These formations
employ the section formations in any combination to allow the platoon to
achieve its mission in any type of terrain. The formations are depicted in
Figure 6-6 and are as follows:
a. One-up. In one-up formation, one section is forward of platoon
headquarters and two sections move parallel to and on either
side of platoon headquarters. It is normally used when moving
in open country against an unlocated enemy.
b. Two-up. In two-up formation, two sections advance parallel to
and level with each other, forward of platoon headquarters,
while the third section is to the rear. It is used when the platoon
has to cover a wide front, or in the attack when the width of the
objective calls for two sections to arrive simultaneously.
c. Column. In column formation, the sections and platoon head-
quarters move one behind the other. It is used when the platoon
is moving along linear features such as roads and tracks.
OBSOLETE
DIRECTION OF ADVANCE DIRECTION OF ADVANCE DIRECTION OF ADVANCE
TWO UP ONE UP COLUMN
1 SECT 2 SECT 1 SECT 1 SECT

PL HQ
PL HQ 2 SECT PL HQ 3 SECT
3 SECT 2 SECT
3 SECT
Figure 6-6. Platoon Formations

6–8
614. The formations shown in Figure 6-6 are not rigid. A possible
variation is that, in the two-up formation, the rear section could move
across behind one of the leading sections. This gives a platoon in column
with one section on the flank, providing flank protection.
615. Spacing. The spacing between sections can be varied and will be
governed by the requirement for control and the closeness of the country.
Control of platoon formations requires a lot of practice in the use of field
signals, runners, link men and other control measures in order to maintain
relative distances between sections. The platoon commander must balance
the need for control against the necessity for dispersal to avoid:
a. casualties from artillery and mortar fire; and
b. all three sections being engaged simultaneously, thereby de-
priving the platoon commander of his ability to manoeuvre.
SECTION 6-4. CONTACT DRILLS

General
616. Every soldier in the section must be aware of what is required of
OBSOLETE
him when contact is made with the enemy. Instinctive reaction is essential
and it is the individual soldier's responsibility to search the ground
continuously for possible fire positions.
617. There are two procedures which are used at section level only:
a. basic drill, and
b. contact drills.
Basic Drill
618. The basic drill is used when a section comes under effective small
arms fire while advancing or patrolling in open country. The section will be
moving on a broad front and contact may be made at ranges of several
hundred metres. The basic drill is an individual drill and will not require
the section to redeploy as if it were in close, restricting country. Usually the
section commander will be able to see almost as much of the opening
situationas thescouts.
619. On contact, every man will run to the nearest cover or as directed
by the section commander.
620. On taking cover, each man moves a short distance, so that he
reappears, in a different position. As soon as possible each man rises to a
position of observation, if necessary, moving a short distance to do so.
6–9
Everybody must remain within voice control distance of his section
commander. As soon as a man sights the enemy, he opens fire without
further orders. The actions can be summed up as follows:
a. run,
b. down,
c. crawl or roll,
d. observe,
e. aim, and
f. fire.
621. The section commander must assume control of fire as soon as
possible.
Contact Drills
622. Contact drills are automatic actions designed to regain or exploit
initiative without the need for orders. They are used in close country where
the section is frequently forced to move in single file and where contact
frequently occurs at ranges of 20 metres or less. There will be a lot of close
OBSOLETE
fighting, noise and confusion, and the commander will not be in a position
to issue an order immediately because he will know little of the enemy
strength or dispositions. It is vital that the section should counter quickly
with a prearranged plan.
623. Contact drills are used to cover this initial period of surprise and to
give the section commander time to appreciate the situation and make a
plan. There will be occasions where the nature of the ground, vegetation, or
the enemy disposition will not permit a drill to be used. In such cases, the
section commander will quickly issue orders for the placement of his
section on the ground.
624. Contact drills allow the section to deploy quickly, provide a degree
of all round protection and enable the section commander to know the
location of his troops. Once a section commander gives an order, the drill
has finished.
625. Contact drills will be used by:
a. the leading section of a large force;
b. a section moving on its own; and
c. a fighting patrol. (When the patrol consists of two or more sec-
tions, only the leading section may need to carry out the drill.)
6–10
626. The success of contact drills depends on:
a. practice,
b. aggression,
c. speed,
d. discipline, and
e. common sense.
627. the types of contact drills are:

a. contact front,
b. contact rear,
c. immediate ambush, and
d. counter ambush.
Contact Front
628. When a section makes contact to the front, two actions must take
place as rapidly as possible:
a.
b.
OBSOLETE
the maximum amount of firepower must be directed at the en-
emy, and
the section must be deployed to positions from which the section
commander can exert control.
629. Sequence of Action. The following drill is to be conducted when
contact is made to the front:
a. The scouts immediately return fire and deploy to a fire position.
Both scouts attempt to assess the enemy dispositions.
b. As the scouts engage the enemy, all members of the section
shout, ‘CONTACT FRONT'.
c. The section commander goes to ground to the rear of the scouts
fire position, but remains in voice contact with them.
d. The gun group doubles forward to a fire position approximately
level with the section commander, but on the right of the line of
advance, or if applicable, to the higher ground side. The gun
group can then open fire in the direction of the enemy position.
e. The remainder of the section doubles forward and takes up po-
sitions to the rear of the section commander.
6–11
630. Figure 6-7 shows the section at the time of contact and Figure 6-8
shows the relative positions of the section after the drill has been
completed.
Enemy
Position Scout group Rifle group
Direction Section Machine gun
of advance Commander group
HIGH GROUND SIDE

alternatively
Machine gun
Enemy group Rifle group
Position Scout group
Direction of
advance Section
Commander HIGH GROUND SIDE
OBSOLETE
Figure 6-7 Situation at Time of ‘Contact Front'
Scout group
Enemy Direction of Rifle group

Position advance
Section
Commander
Machine gun
group HIGH GROUND SIDE
Figure 6-8. Situation After Order ‘Contact Front'

6–12
631. It may not be possible for either the gun or rifle group to double
forward as suggested, because of intense enemy fire or dense vegetation.
When this occurs, movement may have to be by individual fire and
movement within each group. Individuals may have to crawl forward. If
enemy fire is so intense as to restrict movement, the section commander
may terminate the drill in order to prevent his entire section from moving
forward and subsequently being pinned down.
632. A common fault is for the gun group to move too far to a flank and
become isolated from the remainder of the section. The gun group is to
remain in contact with the section commander. If there is a requirement
for the gun group to move further to a flank, the movement should be
covered by fire. This is not part of the contact drill.
633. Subsequent action depends on the information that the section
commander can obtain from the scouts or other members of the section, or
from his own appreciation.
Contact Rear
634. When contact is made from the rear, the immediate requirement is
the same as for the contact front:
a.
b.
OBSOLETE
the maximum amount of firepower must be directed at the en-
emy, and
the section must be deployed to positions from which the section
commander can exert control.
635. Sequence of Action. The drill for contact rear is as follows:
a. The rear two men immediately return fire and seek cover. Both
then attempt to assess the enemy dispositions. The rear two
men may be either riflemen or a rifleman and the number 2 on
the MG depending on the section formation.
b. As this occurs, all members of the section shout, ‘CONTACT
REAR'.
c. The remaining rifleman (or riflemen) goes to ground and guides
the section commander and scout group as they move to join
him.
d. The gun group turns around and doubles back to a fire position
approximately level with the last two men. They remain on the
same side of the axis of advance as they were on before the con-
tact. The gun group commences to fire in the direction of the en-
emy position.
6–13
e. The section commander doubles back to a position in behind

where the two rear men are engaging the enemy, so that he is in
voice contact with them.
f. The scouts double back and take up a position alongside the ri-
fleman (or riflemen) who has gone to ground, so that they are
slightly to the rear of the section commander, facing in the direc-
tion of the enemy.
636. Figure 6-9 shows the situation at the time of contact and Figure
6-10 shows the relative positions of the section after the order ‘Contact
Rear'.
OBSOLETE
Direction of advance
Enemy
Scout Group Section Machine gun Rifle Group contact
Commander group
HIGH GROUND SIDE
Figure 6-9. Situation at Time of ‘Contact Rear'

6–14
Last two
riflemen
Remaining
riflemen
Scouts
Enemy
contact
Section
Commander
Machine gun
group
OBSOLETE
HIGH GROUND SIDE
Figure 6-10. Situation After Order ‘Contact Rear'
637. Subsequent action depends on the information that the section

commander can obtain from the remainder of the section, or from his own
appreciation.
Immediate Ambush and Counter Ambush
638. The immediate ambush and counter ambush drills are described in
MLW Two, Inf Trg 3.4, Ambush and Counter Ambush.
Platoon Contact Drills
639. Contact, Front and Rear. Platoon contact drills follow the same
general pattern as section drills. The section(s) in contact will carry out the
section contact drill (be it contact front/rear). Platoon headquarters and the
rear section(s) close up to the section in front, but remain out of contact and
wait for the platoon commander's orders. The platoon contact drill ends
when the sections are all on the ground in an all round defensive posture.
See Figures 6-11 and 6-12.
6–15
MG
Enemy Contacted Pl Comd Pl Sgt
Sect Comd
MG
MG
High Ground Side
OBSOLETE
Direction of
Movement On Contact
Drill Complete
MG
Pl Sgt
Pl Comd
Enemy
Location
MG
MG
Figure 6-11. Situation Before and After ‘Contact Front'

6–16
MG
Contact by
enemy
MG
On Contact
OBSOLETE
Drill Complete
Enemy
Position
Figure 6-12. Situation Before and After ‘Contact Rear'

7–1
CHAPTER 7
CLOSING WITH THE ENEMY
701. The primary task of the platoon is to kill the enemy. To achieve this
the members of the platoon must be close enough to either shoot, grenade
or bayonet their opponents. When the platoon is in defence, it is the enemy
who must move and expose himself. In the advance, the attack and the
withdrawal, some or all of the platoon must move if they are to engage the
enemy. This will often involve exposure to enemy observation and fire.
This exposure must be minimised if the platoon is to succeed. This can be
achieved by:
a. the use of covered or concealed approaches,
b. the use of smoke or darkness to conceal movement, and
c. the use of covering fire to neutralise enemy weapons and allow
movement over exposed ground.
OBSOLETE
702. These techniques can only be used effectively if the members of the
platoon have achieved a high standard of fitness, fieldcraft, weapons
handling and marksmanship. Detailed information on these subjects will
be found in the other pamphlets in the MLW Infantry Training series.
SECTION 7-2. USE OF COVERED/CONCEALED
APPROACHES
General
703. Surveillance Devices. The enemy is likely to be equipped with
surveillance devices in addition to the usual warning devices such as trip
flares, mines and improvised devices. When moving in the area of
operations, commanders must assume such devices are being used against
them. Night does not offer guaranteed protection against detection and
routes must be planned as for day, using covered and concealed routes,
particularly in areas in which the enemy is known to be active. A thorough
understanding of equipment characteristics and tactical use is necessary
to enable the effects of these surveillance devices to be minimised.
Selection of Lines of Advance
704. The selection of lines of advance for a platoon is largely a matter of
map reading. After deciding on the area to be studied, which must be
larger than the area to be occupied or crossed, apply the catchword
‘GROUND':
7–2
G General. Get a rough idea of the character of the area - the
topography and vegetation.
R Ridges. Mark on the tale with a single line, the highest part
of all ranges and spurs. Mark in a different colour the
streams or lowest lines of valleys and re-entrants.
O Observation. Circle with a pencil any particularly good ob-
servation points or detached features.
U Undergrowth or Cover. Study the location of villages, pri-
mary and secondary jungle, woods, belts of trees or rough
ground.
N Non-passable. Mark non-passable areas with a capital N.
D Defilade. The covered line of approach to any point, and the
areas that afford cover, can now easily be picked out.
705. A clear picture of the ground as a whole, its possibilities and its
disadvantages is formed, and a plan can then be made indicating:
a. where to move, and
b. where covering fire is most necessary.
SECTION 7-3. USE OF SMOKE OR DARKNESS
Use of Smoke
OBSOLETE
706. The principal use of smoke is to screen movement from enemy
observation and therefore from observed fire. Smoke can be produced by
indirect fire, direct fire weapons and smoke grenades.
707. Smoke is a valuable weapon but it has limitations:
a. Weather conditions must be suitable. It is impossible to lay an
effective smoke screen in a high wind. A moderate wind blowing
at right angles to the screen, will also reduce its linear coverage.
When there is no wind at all, smoke tends to billow and a great
deal of ammunition may be needed to establish and maintain a
screen.
b. Smoke affects other supporting fire; it usually makes aimed fire
support impossible.
c.
Only a limited supply of smoke grenades is carried within the
platoon.
Movement by Night
708. Darkness helps provide concealment and assists surprise.
Darkness is not a guarantee against detection and measures must be
taken against surveillance devices. Experience in handling our
7–3
equipments and knowledge of enemy equipments will determine how best
to minimise their effectiveness. Movement by night requires constant
practice, particularly in the crossing of obstacles.
709. The main differences between night and day operations are as
follows:
a. Small arms fire is difficult to aim and is generally too high. MGs
can fire on fixed lines, and small arms night sighting equipment
may be used. Small arms night aiming techniques should be
practised regularly.
b. Sight is largely replaced by other senses. Avoidance of noise and
creating distinctive smells are of the greatest importance.
c. Objects generally are visible only on skylines. This increases
the importance of using low ground, both for movement and ob-
servation.
d. Maintaining direction is difficult. This makes previous daylight
reconnaissance necessary whenever possible.
e. Control is difficult. Close formations are necessary.
710.
a. OBSOLETE
Particular attention should be paid to the following points at night:
Equipment must not shine in the moonlight and not rattle.
Sandbags wrapped round equipment and tools will prevent
shine and deaden sound.
b. Orders and messages must be passed in a whisper, just loud
enough for them to be heard by the recipient. Asimple system of
signals should be arranged.
c. Particular care must be taken in crossing gaps where move-
ment may show against the skyline.
d. The stars, the moon, the wind and landmarks silhouetted
against the sky can be used to keep direction.
e. Commanders must be well forward for control of pace and direc-
tion.
f. After every halt, allow time for everyone to prepare to move and
to check that the man behind is ready.
7–4
SECTION 7-4. FIRE AND MOVEMENT
General
711. The closer the platoon gets to the enemy, the more difficult it
becomes to find routes which avoid his observation and fire. Movement
over exposed ground will be very risky unless accurate covering fire can
prevent the enemy from using his weapons effectively. This fire may be
provided by artillery or armour, or from other elements of the battalion or
company. The platoon will often have to rely on its own resources for
covering fire.
712. Regardless of how the covering fire is provided, the technique of
using fire to cover exposed movement is known as `fire and movement'.
Within the platoon, one or more sections may cover the movement of
another. A section may conduct its own fire and movement by using the
MG group to cover the movement of the remainder. The same technique
can be used between individuals within groups. In this way there is always
‘one foot on the ground' with one element moving, and at least one other in
a position to provide covering fire. On occasions it may even be necessary to
carry out fire and movement within a section or group which is itself
already receiving covering fire from another section or platoon.
OBSOLETE
Basic Considerations
713. There are six basic considerations for section and platoon fire and
movement. They are:
a. control by the commander,
b. speed,
c. winning the fire fight using all available fire support,
d. wide angle of covering fire,
e. maximum use of cover and concealment, and
f. minimum exposed movement without covering fire.
Control
714. Fire and movement is time consuming, very tiring and usually
costly in ammunition. It must not start any earlier than necessary. As the
enemy must be neutralised by fire throughout any exposed movement,
careful coordination is always necessary. The commander must exercise
strict control over who fires, at what, and when.
715. Fire discipline will be difficult to achieve during fire and movement.
The ground will be unfamiliar, accurate ranges may not be known,
reference points may not have been given, enemy positions may be difficult
7–5
to detect, and the passage of information and orders by voice will be
difficult. Every soldier must search his arc for targets and report them to
his commander. Control by field signals and whistle must also be
practised, and commanders in particular must be skilled in the issue of fire
control orders and in all the associated skills. Further details on fire
discipline will be found in MLW Two, Inf Trg 3.2, Fieldcraft and Target
Detection, Chapters 7 to 12 inclusive.
716. Commanders must exercise strict control over the movement of
individuals and groups. Control will be made easier if leaders are
appointed for each group within the section to control fire and movement
within that group. This will reduce the load on the section commander,
particularly in confused situations such as fighting through an objective.
Speed
717. The longer it takes to close with the enemy using fire and
movement, the greater the opportunity for the enemy to inflict casualties
or to withdraw. Speed in the execution of fire and movement will retain the
initiative and keep up the momentum of the assault. Speed in individual
movement over exposed ground will minimise casualties. The conflict
between the requirement for control, the need for speed, and the need to
OBSOLETE
minimise exposed movement can be reduced by training.
Winning the Fire Fight
718. While the assaulting platoon is under fire from the defenders, the
commander must develop sufficient firepower to win the fire fight,
neutralising the enemy's fire and enabling the assaulting troops to break
into the objective. To achieve this superiority the platoon commander may:
a. use one or even two sections to neutralise enemy defensive fire,
b. group his MGs and/or grenadiers into a fire support team,
c. use the support company weapons available,
d. use part or all of another platoon or company,
e. use tank or APC fire,
f. use artillery, or
g. combine some of the methods listed above.
719. The firefight may last several hours and resupply will be a critical
consideration. The commander must always consider the quantities of
ammunition used, maintaining sufficient to continue the fight through.
Weapon characteristics, control of fire and movement and supporting
7–6
weapon safety distances must be taken into account. There will be a time
when the enemy's fire and reaction to the assault weakens. The platoon
commander must be aware of this and quickly take the initiative to
achieve the break-in.
Wide Angle of Covering Fire
720. A wide angle between the covering fire and those moving allows the
fire to continue until the last possible moment; a right angle, as depicted in
Figure 7-1 , is ideal. This must not, however, cause a loss of control or
reduce speed.
Enemy
OBSOLETE
Fire Support
Angle of
Fire Support
Assault
Figure 7-1. Wide Angle of Covering Fire

7–7
Maximum Use of Cover and Concealment
721. Every member of the platoon must be able to:
a. recognise a good fire position,
b. choose the most protected route to a fire position,
c. employ the most appropriate method of movement to reach fire
position, and
d. remain concealed when in it.
722. The characteristics of a good fire position and the various
techniques of movement and concealment are explained in detail in MLW
Two, Inf Trg 3.2, Fieldcraft and Target Detection, Chapters 1 to 4 inclusive.
Minimum Exposed Movement Without Covering Fire
723. Any movement which may be exposed to enemy fire should be
supported by covering fire. To be fully effective, fire should begin before
movement and stop only after movement is complete. The fire must be
accurate and continuous.
Techniques and Training
OBSOLETE
724. Training. Well executed fire and movement is not easily achieved.
It demands a high standard of individual skills and good teamwork. These
will only be achieved by practice which is closely supervised, followed by
careful correction of faults. Some common faults are as follows:
a. Soldiers Exposed for Too Long When Moving. Movement must
be short and fast.
b. Predictable Patterns of Movement. Commanders must vary the
selection of the groups to move.
c. Bunching Behind Obvious Fire Positions. Obvious positions
will draw more enemy fire and bunching increases vulnerabil-
ity to fragmentation weapons.
d. Failure to Select the Next Fire Position Before Moving. This in-
creases the period of exposure and usually results in the occu-
pation of poor fire positions.
e. Poor Selection of Fire Positions. Fire positions should at least of-
fer concealment (desirably cover) from fire, and must allow ef-
fective use of the weapon.
f. Commencing Fire and Movement Too Soon. Fire and movement
should only commence in response to effective enemy direct fire.
Fire and movement provides no protection from indirect fire, it
merely keeps soldiers in the target area for longer.
RESTRICTED
7–8
725. Scouts. Scouts move in pairs from bound to bound; one moving
quickly to the next objective covered by the second who observes the area of
concern. In this manner a scout can be supported if he is surprised. The
considerations listed in paragraph 7.24 apply to scouts' movements. Scouts
move in one of three ways:
a. Caterpillar. The leading scout goes forward to a bound, and
when he is in position the second scout closes up. The leading
scout then moves on to the next bound and so on.
b. Leap Frog. The second scout closes up, but instead of stopping
near the leading scout, continues on to the next bound.
c. Trail. Both scouts continue moving with a suitable gap between
them.
726. The platoon commander must be able to halt his scouts at any time.
Control is exercised through field signals.
727. Techniques. There are a number of techniques which the platoon
and section commanders on foot can use to close with the enemy. They can
best be explained in relation to the assault.
OBSOLETE
728. Advance in Extended Line. During the earliest stage of the
assault, the platoon may move in extended line when it is protected by
covering fire and not receiving effective small arms fire. Control is
relatively easy to maintain and a steady rate of assault, coordinated with
the fire support is possible. This method also conserves the platoon's
physical strength and ammunition. At all times the platoon must be
prepared to adopt fire and movement.
729. By Dry Fire and Movement. As the enemy position is being
neared, the platoon commander may decide to move his platoon by fire and
movement in groups, but not firing. Dry fire and movement is used when
the platoon still has not been effectively engaged with aimed small-arms
fire. Circumstances which warrant the adoption of the technique includes
the lifting (or imminent lifting) of covering fire, enemy troops seen taking
up firing positions, or simply the closeness of the enemy's position. The
technique enhances the platoon's ability to deal with the expected enemy
fire and conserves ammunition, but it does require greater physical effort
and should not be adopted until there is a need to do so.
7–9
730. Fire and Movement by Groups. Once effective small-arms fire
is being received, the platoon and its sections will start to use fire and
movement. Sections and possibly sub-section groups will move by fire and
movement.
731. Pepperpotting. Another technique of fire and movement is
known as pepperpotting and can be used at group and section level. It can
be used when the attackers are close to the enemy, but is more suitable
when they are fighting through an enemy position. It is a good method of
ensuring elements do not advance too far in front of their own troops, and
therefore minimises the risk of being shot by their covering fire, but it is
limited by the noise of battle which can lead to confusion. It can be
achieved by numbering off each member as either odd or even and using
the following commands in battle:
‘ODDS GO! (or one whistle blast)'
or
‘EVENS GO! (or two whistle blasts)'
732. This method has the advantages of good control, an even
distribution of covering fire and is simple. It has the disadvantages of a
OBSOLETE
narrow angle of covering fire, a predictable pattern of movement, and it
breaks up section groups.
Aggression
733. Fire and movement must be conducted aggressively to be
successful. The aggressive attitude required of all members of the platoon
must be demanded and developed in training.
SECTION 7-5. MOUNTED PLATOONS

734. APCs. APC characteristics and formations are described in Section
2-4. Although APCs provide protection, speed and flexibility,
considerations of approaches, use of smoke and/or darkness, and fire and
movement within the unit are still applicable.
735. Dismounting. Once the mounted platoon has covered the
distance from the line of departure (LD) to the vicinity of the enemy
defensive position, the decision on where to dismount becomes a major
consideration. There are four options. Platoons can dismount:
a. well short of the enemy forward pits;
b. just short of the enemy forward pits:
c. on the enemy position; or
7–10
d. after the enemy position has been driven through and the APCs
have reached the rear of the enemy position. The dismounted
platoon will then fight through the position from rear to front.
736. The decision as to where to dismount will usually be made by the
company or battalion commander. Considerations include:
a. the enemy anti-armour threat;
b. the ground;
c. enemy field defences and the extent of his position;
d. the fire support available, both indirect and direct;
e. enemy tactics and likely reaction;
f. the mission; and
g. control.
737. Dismount Well Short of the Enemy Forward Pits. Infantry
may dismount well short of the enemy forward pits if there is a significant
OBSOLETE
anti-armour threat, insufficient fire support to cover closer movement, or
the terrain is unsuitable for APCs. Advantages are that this technique
reduces the anti-armour threat and could enhance surprise if used at night
in conjunction with a deception plan, ie, using the noise of the APCs to
deceive the enemy, as they move away from the dismount point.
Disadvantages are that there will be a long assault without the
considerable advantages of speed, protection, communications and fire
support. The flexibility provided by the APCs is lost as well as the shock
effect if used in conjunction with tanks and other fire support. As a general
rule commanders should aim to remain mounted as long as possible.
738. Dismount Just Short of the Enemy Forward Pits. Precisely
when to dismount depends on the enemy defences. The commander should
aim to pass through most, if not all of the known enemy wire and
anti-personnel minefields and the anticipated enemy killing areas. An
additional guideline is to move the APCs as close as possible to the indirect
covering fire. If this fire was falling on the forward pits the dismount point
would be about 100 m away, or less if the ground permits. Direct covering
fire may allow an even closer approach. The advantages of this are that the
final assault is very short and may well be the start of the break-in stage,
and most or all of the enemy defences are breached and killing areas
passed over. Control is easier if troops dismount just short of the enemy
forward pits. They will know the direction to the enemy and the APCs can
ensure the assault formation is as required, usually extended line. During
7–11
the dismount the APCs' MGs can give intense fire support to cover the
dismount. Disadvantages are that not all of the field defences may be
breached, and at the closer range the APCs become more vulnerable to
SRAAWs and heavy machine gun (HMGs).
739. Dismount on the Enemy Position. Dismounting on the enemy
position has a number of advantages, but should only be considered if the
extent and depth of the enemy position is known. The shock effect,
especially on demoralised defenders, is considerable. Disadvantages are
also considerable, especially if the extent of the enemy position is not fully
realised, or insufficient troops and firepower are committed to the assault.
Control may easily be lost, and APCs will be highly vulnerable to SRAAWs
and HMGs. Well-disciplined enemy troops in well-prepared defences could
suffer few casualties and cause heavy casualties to assaulting troops.
740. Dismount Through and at the Rear of the Enemy Position.
Compared with dismounting on the enemy position, dismounting at the
rear of the position has advantages, chiefly that it overruns prepared field
defences and killing areas, assaults from the least expected direction and
creates confusion. Disadvantages are significant. APCs will be vulnerable
and if the enemy are well trained and in well-prepared positions, few, if
OBSOLETE
any of them may be killed during the assault and a long fight-through is
still a probability. Control is also more difficult as troops in APCs will
become disoriented and confused just before dismount.
741. Other Considerations. The commander, when making the critical
decision on where to dismount, has other considerations. He may well
decide that he will go as far as possible in APCs and dismount on
command. The time for the dismount may be dictated by the effectiveness
of the enemy anti-armour fire, the terrain, and the risks the commander
may be willing to accept in moving close to his fire support. The standard of
training of his troops with APCs and armour is important. If his troops are
mechanised and always train to fight and operate with tanks, the
commander will be able to use his troops on options requiring greater skill
and expertise than if the troops were mounted only for that particular
operation.
7–12
OBSOLETE
8–1
CHAPTER 8
PROTECTION
801. A platoon or section cannot be regarded as secure unless it is
protected in all directions from which an attack is possible. It must be
guarded to the front, the flanks, the rear and from the air. A section or
platoon can still be subjected to attack even when it is not in direct contact
with the enemy, and when other troops appear to provide security. It must
always be ready to fight and should protect itself from any threat,
including assault, guerilla forces, enemy agents, saboteurs, and nuclear or
chemical attack.
802. The forms of protection considered here are:
a. protection at rest;
b. use of sentries;
c. protection against air attack; and
OBSOLETE
d. nuclear, biological and chemical (NBC) protection;
803. Information on protection on the move is detailed in Chapter 11 of
this pamphlet.
804. Every commander is responsible for the protection of his men. This
entails taking steps to safeguard against surprise, concealing his
dispositions from the enemy, and in the case of nuclear threat, ensuring
adequate dispersion and passive defence.
805. Platoon and section commanders must always be alert to the threat
of surprise attack. Anticipation and preparedness will reduce casualties to
a minimum. In particular, they must ensure that their men:
a. are alert to the threat,
b. know what to do in various circumstances, and
c. know why they are doing it.
806. Precautions against surprise attack must be continuous. Protection
is very largely a matter of self discipline, the example being set always by
the commanders.
807. Where enemy ground action is possible, troops should always be
armed and should move in pairs where possible. When troops are engaged
8–2
in tasks not permitting the carriage of arms, such as digging, weapons are
to be placed within reach. Equipment, if not worn, must be placed nearby,
assembled for immediate use. If there is a chemical warfare threat the
NBC ensemble must be worn and the respirator carried.
SECTION 8-2. PROTECTION AT REST
General
808. Whenever troops are halted for any length of time they must be
allotted tactical positions which are to be occupied in the event of a threat.
These positions are termed fire positions and are to be sited to meet ground
attack from any direction and give concealment from air observation. The
characteristics of a good fire position are described in MLW Two, Inf Trg
3.2, Fieldcraft and Target Detection.
809. The requirement for protection at rest will depend on the duration
of the halt and the topography. There are different requirements for:
a. brief halts in open and close country,
b. extended halts in close country, and
c. extended halts in open country.
OBSOLETE
Brief Halts in Open and Close Country
810. During any tactical movement there will be a requirement for
frequent brief halts of less than 10 minutes. It would be impracticable to
require the platoon to deploy into a defensive position at each of these
halts. During brief halts the platoon members will remain in formation
and adopt fire positions covering their arcs of responsibility. This drill
should be performed automatically in open or close country whenever the
field signal for ‘halt' is given.
811. Procedures for halts for longer periods, and whether or not to adopt
a harbour drill, will be decided by the platoon commander. Regardless of
the procedure used, the guidelines for security, all round defence and the
operational situation must be considered.
Extended Halts in Close Country - Harbour Drill

812. During lengthy halts in close country (including overnight halts)
the harbour drill should be used. Depending on visibility and patrolling
formation, the procedure may be modified at the discretion of the
commander. Any modification should, however, be well thought out and
should be practised as a platoon drill.
8–3
813. The harbour drill is designed to enable the platoon to deploy
quickly into a defensive position in close country with the minimum of
orders or delay.
814. Selection of Site. It is rarely advisable for a platoon or section to
bivouac or halt on a track, even the track it has made by its own passage.
Advantage must be taken of the security provided by freedom from
observation in close country. A site should be chosen well away from
tracks, townships, and other features which may be frequented by the local
population or by hostile patrols. An overnight position should not be
occupied until about two hours before dark.
815. Breaking Track. The procedure for leaving an existing track
without making a fresh one is as follows:
a. The place of departure from the track is selected.
b. The column is halted at normal intervals. Section commanders
must ensure that there is no closing up.
c. A warning order is passed back - ‘BREAK TRACK LEFT (or
RIGHT)'. On an order or signal, each man turns to the left (or
right) and moves directly into the undergrowth on a given bear-
d. OBSOLETE
ing or angle, being careful not to disrupt the foliage.
Section commanders must see that direction and contact with
flank sections are maintained.
e. Movement is continued for the period specified or for a given
number of paces, or until the platoon commander is confident
that the distance travelled has achieved the aim of security.
f. The original direction is then resumed until the bivouac site is
reached.
816. Although this technique helps to conceal the place the track was
left, it does not deceive a well-trained enemy. The normal measures for
protection must still be taken.
817. A method of occupying a platoon harbour in close country is termed
the 12 o'clock method and is illustrated in Figure 8-1. It is assumed that
the platoon will remain in a position for a reasonable period, eg, over 30
minutes.
818. Having conducted a limited reconnaissance and selected the site
for the base, the platoon commander places himself in the centre of the
intended perimeter and indicates the direction of 12 o'clock. On receipt of
this signal, section commanders take their men to their respective
positions in relation to 12 o'clock.
8–4
12 o'clock
Rfn MG
Team
SECOND Rfn
SECTION Scouts FIRST
Sect 2IC
SECTION
Rfn
Sect 2IC Sect Comd
Sect Comd PLATOON
HQ Scouts
MG
Rfn
Team Scouts
Sect Comd
MG 4 o'clock
8 o'clock Team
Rfn Sect 2IC

Rfn
OBSOLETE Direction of entry

THIRD SECTION
Figure 8-1. General Layout and Occupation of a Platoon

Harbour in Close Country
819. Clearing Patrols. Once the harbour site has been occupied the
section commander will move to the platoon commander and report that
his section is in position and is standing to. The sequence of events then
will be as follows:
a. In most cases the platoon commander will be able to see his per-
imeter and check that the sections have tied in with one another
and that they are in the area he indicated. In close country this
may be impossible and before a clearing patrol (Figure 8-2 ) is
sent out he should move around the perimeter to ensure it is
tied in and correctly positioned. Once he is satisfied the platoon
commander will order ‘CLEARING PATROLS OUT'.
b. Section commanders will then dispatch their scouts. The scouts
will move out of the harbour from the right of their respective
section positions, near the MG of the neighbouring section.
c. Section commanders then return to their section MG positions.
8–5
d. The scouts from each section move in an anti-clockwise direc-

tion at a distance from the perimeter which will depend on the
density of vegetation. One scout will move at a visual distance
from the perimeter, the other will move at a visual distance
from him. Both scouts will sweep the area in front of their sec-
tions and return through their section MG location on the left of
their section position (Figure 8-2).
e. When the clearing patrols have returned, the section com-
manders will relay their reports to the platoon commander at
the platoon headquarters position.
f. After the clearing patrols have cleared the area, the platoon
commander will move clockwise around the harbour position,
commencing at the MG position of the first section. He will take
each section commander through the section position, checking
the position of the section members and coordinating between
sections where necessary. Noise and movement must be re-
duced to a minimum.
g. Once the platoon commander has completed any necessary ad-
OBSOLETE
justments within the section, the section commander collects
the member of the section who is first on the sentry roster and
returns to the MG location. The sentry's pack will be left in his
position.
820. Sentries. After the platoon commander has adjusted the position
he will then order ‘SENTRIES OUT', usually only one in front of each MG
position. Additional information on sentries is contained in Section 8-3 of
this chapter. The following actions should then occur:
a. The remainder of the platoon remove their packs.
b. The section commander posts the sentry with the 2IC noting
the sentry post. A possible location for sentries is shown in
Figure 8-2.
c. Having briefed the sentry, the section commander returns to
the platoon commander at platoon headquarters and reports
‘SENTRY POSTED'. As the section 2IC returns from the sentry
post he will lay a communication cord from the sentry post to
the MG location, from the MG location to the section com-
mander's location, and from the section commander's location
to the platoon commander. The 2IC will also inform the No 1 on
the MG of the sentry's location and his withdrawal route.
8–6
821. When all section commanders have reported ‘SENTRIES
POSTED', the platoon commander orders ‘STAND DOWN'. On this order
the next rostered sentry for each section will man his section's MG. The
other members of the section will commence the sequence of development.
Route taken by Scouts
Sentry of 1 Sect
(1st Sect)
PE
R RI
B OU ME
AR TE
H R
2nd Sect 1st Sect

A B
3rd Sect
Sentry Sentry
(2nd Sect) (3rd Sect)
OBSOLETE
Figure 8-2. Clearing Patrols and Sentries Sequence of Development.
Notes:
1. Distance A to B represents one visual distance.

822. Sequence of Development. The sequence of development of the
harbour is as follows:
a. Track Plan. The track plan must be instituted first to avoid
trampling of the area before security is compromised. Ideally it
is done, in part, during the occupation.
b. Fighting trenches and latrines are commenced.
c. Perimeter vines (chest height perimeter cord) and communica-
tions cord are laid out before dark. On ‘STAND DOWN' in the
evening, the perimeter vine will be raised and fastened at chest
height. On ‘STAND TO' in the morning the perimeter vine will
be lowered to the ground.
8–7
d. Shelters will be placed on the ground, laid out ready for erec-
tion. They will not be erected until after dark, that is, ‘STAND
DOWN' at night. They will be dropped at ‘STAND TO' in the
morning.
e. Normal daily routine tasks are completed.
f. Pits are developed further as time and the situation permit.
Extended Halts in Open Country
823. The harbour drill is not suitable in open country as the section MGs
must be sited to cover likely approaches and to provide mutual support.
The other weapon pits in the sections must also be sited to protect the gun
and to cover the section's sector of responsibility. In open country, the
platoon must deploy into a hasty defence position during lengthy halts,
especially during overnight stays. In hasty defence the basic
considerations and actions are the same as for the deliberate defence,
which is described in Chapter 12.
824. To save time, the hasty defence position for open country can be
developed from the platoon harbour drill used in close country. The platoon
OBSOLETE
should deploy in a similar manner but the sections must be adjusted to
form defended posts which are mutually supporting within the platoon
locality. The platoon commander must take particular care to select a site
which provides good fields of fire and observation and minimises the
likelihood of surprise attack. After the clearing patrols have cleared the
area, the platoon commander will site the section MGs and allocate tasks
for the MG and the sections. The section commanders must then select the
sites for the remaining section weapons and allocate arcs of responsiblity.
SECTION 8-3. SENTRIES
General
825. Sentries must always be posted for the local protection of any body
of troops. They are responsible for checking the identity of visitors or
suspicious persons in the vicinity. The security of the position depends on
the alertness and efficiency of the sentries. They must be able to alert the
section silently by day and night and must avoid unnecessary movement.
They should be concealed and in a position from which they can observe
and fire effectively.
826. The number of sentry positions occupied must be sufficient to
ensure security of the locality. Sentries will be posted to give all-round
protection. Particular attention must be paid to likely approaches. This
requirement will vary according to the sections' proximity to enemy
positions, enemy activity, and visibility.
8–8
Sentry Orders
827. Orders for sentries must be carefully thought out so that nothing is
omitted, left to chance or liable to be misunderstood. The orders must be
given clearly. Orders to sentries should be given in the sentry's location
and must include the detail contained in Annex A to this chapter.
Sentry's Task
828. A sentry's task is to provide early warning. He will alert the
position with a pre-arranged signal using such means as communication
cord or wire if:
a. a warning device indicates personnel movement near the post,
or
b. anyone approaches the post.
829. When a person or party closes with the section area, the whole
section must be alert and ready to fire when the sentry challenges.
Challenging
830. The standard challenging procedure must always be followed.
OBSOLETE
Failure to do so may result in casualties being inflicted on friendly troops,
particularly returning patrols. The section commander will always be
alerted if any unexpected person or group approaches the position and, if
the situation warrants it, he will ‘stand to' the section. The sentry will do
the challenging. The challenge will be given quietly at a range that will
enable the section to kill any enemy who tries to run away, but not so close
that the enemy could rush the post. If the order to halt is not obeyed, it is
repeated and if still not obeyed, the orders for opening fire must be
followed. The section commander must ensure that his whole sector
remains covered and that all his men do not all concentrate on one
direction.
831. The standard procedure for challenging and reply is detailed in
Table 8-1.
8–9
TABLE 8-1. STANDARD SENTRY CHALLENGING
PROCEDURE
Serial Action by sentry Action by person or group

challenged
(a) (b) (c)
1. ‘HALT! WHO IS (or Halts and gives any reply which

goes) THERE?' indicates the person or group is
authorised to pass, e.g. ‘B
COMPANY PATROL’,
‘CORPORAL JONES OF 1
SECTION’, etc.
2. ‘ADVANCE (ONE) One person (eg group leader)

AND BE advances without replying.
RECOGNISED’
3. ‘HALT!’ (When the Person halts until recognised by

unknown person has sentry.
OBSOLETE
approached
sufficiently for sentry
to recognise him or to
give challenge).
4. Challenge (if any) is Reply or countersign is given in

given in a low tone. a low tone.
5. ‘ADVANCE Second person or the remainder

ANOTHER ONE of group advances at the order
(or remainder) AND of the sentry to be recognised.
BE RECOGNISED’. Group leader, or person
(Sentry calls forward designated by leader must
remainder one by one remain with the sentry to assist
or as a group, as the in identifying remainder
situation or his orders
demand).
Passwords
832. If a password is used it will always be in two parts; for example:
a. Challenge.. .. ..Derby
b. Countersign.. ..Winner
8–10
833. If the two parts have some connection, as in the example given,
they will be easier to remember but the connection must not be so obvious
that an enemy may guess the countersign.
Number of Sentries
834. By Day. The minimum requirement in the best conditions by day,
is to have one sentry manning each section's MG. A second sentry may be
deployed forward of the MG to give early warning. This will be normal in
close country, where the second sentry should be far enough forward of the
perimeter to observe ground which the gunner cannot see. He must be out
of hearing range of any noise from the occupied position, such as digging.
In open country the field of view of the sentry on the MG may be sufficient
not to require a second sentry.
835. By Night. At night it is normal to deploy two sentries on the
section MG. One sentry will physically man the MG and the second sentry
will be beside the gun.
Night Sentry Roster
836. The night sentry's tour of duty should not exceed two hours. This
may require each man in the section to do two tours of duty during the
OBSOLETE
night. Relief of the night sentries should be staggered so that one sentry is
always fresh and the other is aware of the prevailing tactical situation. The
sentry roster is to be prepared under the supervision of the section
commander and notified to every man. An example of a sentry duty roster
is detailed in Table 8-2. The roster should change every night to ensure all
soldiers, over a period of time, receive equal numbers of early, late and
middle of shift tours of duty. Individual characteristics should also be
taken into consideration as some individuals find it nearly impossible to
remain awake and alert during the early hours of the morning while
others find it relatively easy.
TABLE 8-2. EXAMPLE NIGHT SENTRY ROSTER
1 Section Sentry Roster
25 Dec 86
2000-2100 CPL Morgan1 2000-2200 PTE Fairleigh
2100-2300 PTE Morton 2200-2400 PTE McIntosh
2300-0100 PTE MacMillan 2400-0200 PTE Westcott
0100-0300 PTE Harris 0200-0400 PTE Ingle
0300-0500 LCPL Bramah 0400-0500 CPL Morgan
(L MORGAN)
CPL
1. One of the first two sentries does half a shift at the start of the roster and
half of the shift at the end to obtain a staggered system of relief.
8–11
The Section MG at Night

837. If the MG is covering the front of another section then its sentry
must watch that area while the second sentry watches the section's own
front. Strict orders must be issued about opening fire with the MG so that
the position is not prematurely disclosed.
838. It is important that each man retains his own weapon throughout
the night. Weapons should not be rotated throughout the section. The No 1
on the gun will sleep in close proximity to the gun. If the No 1 on the gun
moves away from the MG he will borrow the weapon of the gun sentry.
SECTION 8-4. PROTECTION AGAINST AIR ATTACK

General
839. The measures for obtaining protection against an air attack are
detailed in JSP(AS) 13A Air Defence/Airspace Control and MLW Two
Arty Trg, 1.4, Unit Air Defence and are grouped as follows:
a. Passive Air Defence Measures. All measures other than active
defence, taken to minimise the effect of hostile air action are re-
OBSOLETE
garded as passive. At platoon level the following passive air de-
fence measures can be undertaken:
(1) concealment,
(2) dispersion,
(3) digging-in, and
(4) early warning.
b. Active Air Defence Measures. Active measures include all direct
defensive action taken to destroy or reduce the effectiveness of
an enemy air attack. There are very few active measures that a
platoon can take to resist air attack, except to use its own weap-
ons to try to repel the attack.
Concealment
840. The best protection against air attack is concealment. High priority
must be given at all times to concealment using natural and artificial
camouflage. Even the sighting of a few troops could lead to the disclosure of
a whole unit otherwise well concealed.
841. When troops are moving on foot in open spaces, the following rules
should be observed:
a. On a road or track when tactical deployment is not essential,
sections should move dispersed in single file on one side.
8–12
b. Where practicable, open fields should be skirted. Sections

should move in single file along treelines rather than in the
open. In wet or frosty conditions a few men moving across a field
leave a plainly visible track.
c. If movement has to take place across open ground, sections
should move in an irregular, well dispersed formation.
d. In areas of soft sand, such as in deserts or on beaches, move-
ment should be on outcrops of rock, on harder sand, on the wa-
ter's edge, or in an irregular formation where the beach joins the
land.
842. When the section is at rest, or establishing a defensive position out
of contact with the enemy, the following points should be observed:
a. During temporary halts, men should disperse under cover to
rest, and vehicles should be camouflaged. If there is no cover,
the men should be well dispersed and lying face down, keeping
still and not looking up when aircraft are overhead.
b. Track discipline must be maintained when a post is occupied in
the open. The track plan laid down by the platoon commander
OBSOLETE
must be understood and enforced. Rules for track discipline in
the open are:
(1) make full use of existing tracks;
(2) do not cut corners;
(3) keep new tracks to an absolute minimum;
(4) new tracks must blend into the background pattern, fol-
lowing tree lines (or under the trees), areas of stone or
rock, gullies and stream beds or the edge of grassland and
scrub; and
(5) new tracks which cannot be fitted into the ground pattern
must not stop at the position to which they lead. Such
tracks must be extended further to deceive the enemy.
c. Any spoil from trenches and latrines must be camouflaged or
hidden under overhead cover. If necessary, it should be taken
from the trenches as they are dug and carried to the nearest
cover. Any spoil used for parapets or overhead cover on the
trenches must be camouflaged, as must the bottom of the
trench.
d. Fire trenches should be sited under cover or along some break
in the pattern of the ground, ie, at the edge of a cultivated area
or an area of low scrub or long grass. It may be difficult at times
8–13
to find positions which also fulfil the primary requirements of a
fire trench, but some compromise is usually possible. It is diffi-
cult to conceal a trench which is out in the open, away from any
break in the ground pattern.
e. Fire trenches and shelters must be progressively camouflaged
as they are constructed. The concealment of spoil is a continu-
ous process. Work should not cease until all camouflage is com-
plete.
f. Work on a defensive position during the hours of daylight will
depend on the air situation and the degree of enemy observa-
tion. Under adverse air conditions, work may only be possible at
night.
g. Shiny or light coloured objects which will attract attention from
the air must not be left lying about. Mess tins, mirrors, food con-
tainers, white underwear or towels must all be hidden. Men
should not be allowed to remove their shirts if there is an air or
NBC threat.
h. Fires must not be lit where there is any possibility of the smoke
or flame being observed.
i.
OBSOLETE
Vehicle engines that are warm should be shielded from above,
preferably with a solid object such as an old door, to defeat in-
fra-red detectors. Ideally they should be hidden in or amongst
buildings where there is a more favourable infra-red back-
ground.
Dispersion
843. Dispersion is most important and is probably one of the most
difficult measures to enforce, even with well-trained troops. In open
country, or where it does not prejudice control on the move or at rest,
troops within the platoon must keep dispersed to:
a. assist concealment,
b. avoid presenting a worthwhile target, and
c. reduce casualties if the platoon is attacked.
844. Platoon and section commanders are responsible for ensuring
dispersion of those under their command when they are within enemy
artillery or mortar range, or under an air threat. Control must be
maintained throughout and radio, field telephones, field signals and
runners can all assist. The threat should be considered carefully before
concentrating the platoon or section to collect meals, rations or water.
8–14
845. The commanders of troop carrying vehicles (TCVs) moving by day,
must ensure that their drivers maintain the ordered interval. This will be
about a minimum of 100 metres if air attack is likely. An air sentry must
be posted in each vehicle. In open areas, B vehicles moving on roads and
APCs moving across country may be dispersed even wider. Counter
ambush techniques when troops are moving by TCV are described in detail
in MLW Two, Inf Trg 3.4, Ambush and Counter Ambush.
Digging In
846. During all halts of longer than the regular rest periods, when
patrolling or when enemy air attack is imminent, troops will dig at least
shellscrapes or to Stage 1, depending on the time halted and operational
situation. This should be the first task undertaken upon arriving in any
area. When enemy air activity is intense and men have to sleep in their
trenches, the pits should be developed to Stage 3 as quickly as possible. A
minimum of 50 cm of overhead cover will be necessary.
Early Warning
847. Because air attacks will be swift and often unexpected, early
warning of probable attack is necessary to give troops an opportunity to
OBSOLETE
take cover. This warning may be passed through normal command
channels, or given by local sentries. All sentries should have air watch
included in their duties, and alertness for enemy aircraft is required as
part of normal observation. If tactical sentries do not have a good view of
the air space around them, a special air sentry must be detailed.
848. The speed of low flying aircraft makes them difficult to identify, but
troops must be trained and become proficient in quick aircraft recognition.
Hostile, low-flying aircraft may appear suddenly from behind low hills,
treelines and haze. They will normally try to attack with the sun behind
them.
Action When Attacked
849. The alarm must be given immediately if troops working in the open
are to have any chance of taking cover. This warning is the responsibility of
all sentries in the area and will be passed by whistle, voice, radio or by any
other method which may have been ordered.
850. On the alarm being given, all troops except those in close contact
with the enemy must immediately take cover, below ground level if
possible, and remain there until the ‘all clear' signal is given. When in close
contact with the enemy, troops subjected to air attack must continue to
engage attacking enemy ground forces.
8–15
851. Rules for opening fire on enemy aircraft will be issued in each
theatre of operations in the form of unit SOPs.
SECTION 8-5. NBC PROTECTION
Protection Against Blast Effects
852. The best individual defence against blast is to dig in. Defensive
positions designed for protection against a nuclear attack should be
prepared whenever the tactical situation permits. These positions may
vary from individual weapon pits to improved collective shelters. Certain
materials and types of construction provide good protection against blast:
a. Weapon Pits. Because earth is a good shielding material, a prop-
erly constructed weapon pit provides excellent protection
against blast. Personnel should dig a weapon pit whenever oc-
cupying a position and improve it by providing overhead protec-
tion as soon as time and the situation permit. When correctly
constructed, the weapon pit and overhead protection should be
sufficiently strong to resist being collapsed by blast.
b. Shelters. Tunnels, caves and storm drains will provide effective
shelters unless there is a nearby underground burst. Culverts,
OBSOLETE
drains and ditches can be used in an emergency although they
offer only partial protection. Because they are airtight, AFVs
provide excellent protection in most situations. Any vehicle
made of steel will provide some protection.
c. Protection of Equipment and Supplies. Individual equipment
should be placed in protected positions such as weapon pits or
separate holes. Objects such as ration cans, tools and petrol
cans should be secured to minimise the danger from flying ma-
terials.
Immediate Actions
853. An individual's reaction to nuclear bursts must be spontaneous, if
there is to be any opportunity for self protection. All personnel must be
trained if caught in the open:
a. to move no more than a few steps to cover or drop flat on the
ground, preferably with feet towards the blast centre, and eyes
closed;
b. to protect any exposed skin surfaces; and
c. to remain prone until after the blast wave has passed and de-
bris has stopped falling.
8–16
Personal Decontamination
854. After fallout has settled, personnel should carry out personal
decontamination procedures. Care should be taken during
decontamination to ensure that containers do not contact exposed parts of
the body. Head, face and neck should be wiped clean, or washed if possible;
these actions will reduce the burn hazard associated with prolonged
contact with radioactive material. Final decontamination should be
carried out as soon as possible.
Threat-oriented Protective Posture (TOPP) Levels
855. When operating in an NBC environment, troops must adopt a level
of protection consistent with both the threat and the task being performed.
Procedures adopted for each TOPP level are designed to afford maximum
protection while allowing the task at hand to be completed with the
minimum interruption. The three levels of TOPP are detailed in Table 8-3.
TABLE 8-3. THREAT-ORIENTED PROTECTION POSTURE
LEVELS
OBSOLETE
Serial Level of TOPP Items Worn Items Carried
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1. Minimum Combat clothing. Mask.

(TOPP 1)
2. Medium Protective clothing, Mask and gloves.

(TOPP 2) and overboots.
3. Maximum Protective clothing,

(TOPP 3) mask, gloves and
overboots.
Operational Limitations
856. The prolonged wearing of full protective dress will not always be
practicable because of operational considerations or climate. In high
temperatures, the incidence of heat exhaustion will be high. In addition,
breathing resistance and physiological stress will rapidly cause fatigue.
Both of these factors will, unless great care is taken, cause the condition of
troops to deteriorate quickly to the extent that they are unable to perform
their tasks adequately.
8–17
Further Information
857. Further information on the effects of nuclear weapons and
biological and chemical agents, tactical considerations and measures that
can be used against an attack, are described in MLW One 4.1, Nuclear
Operations and MLW One 4.2, Biological and Chemical Operations
respectively.
Annex: A. Sentry Orders
OBSOLETE
8–18
OBSOLETE
8A–1
ANNEX A TO
CHAPTER 8
SENTRY ORDERS
1. Likely direction of enemy's approach.

2. Arcs of responsibility.
3. Extent of fire lanes.
4. Name of landmarks and reference points.
5. Position of:
a. friendly forces/patrols and when they are due in;
b. other sentries;
c. own `gun' position;
d. flank weapons;
(1) type, and
e. OBSOLETE
(2) distance;
early warning devices; and
f. flares.
6. Concealment and camouflage requirements.
7. Rules of engagement.
8. State of weapon readiness.
9. Challenging procedure.
10. Password.
11. Route to and from sentry position.
12. Location of immediate superior.
13. Timing for tour of duty.
14. System of relief.
15. Action on enemy approach:
a. open fire, or
b. warn commander by a means to be specified.
AL1
8A–2
16. Action on:
a. contact with the enemy by the sentry;
b. contact elsewhere on platoon/company perimeter; and
c. shelling of position.
17. Details of special duties, such as:
a. air sentry, or
b. gas sentry.
OBSOLETE
9–1
CHAPTER 9
BATTLE PROCEDURE
Introduction
901. Before any operation, all ranks must know their tasks and what
support they can expect in the execution of these tasks. If practical, time
must be allowed for reconnaissance, planning and the issue of orders to all
troops involved.
902. Those actions taken by the platoon from the time the situation or
problem appears until an operation is commenced, are collectively termed
‘battle procedure'. Battle procedure allows the commander to launch his
force into battle quickly with the maximum preparation. It ensures that as
many as possible of the actions required before battle are carried out
concurrently, thus saving time. Battle procedure is discussed in detail in
MLW One 5.1, Staff Duties in the Field, 1987.
Aim of Battle Procedure
903. Battle procedure is designed to enable the platoon to launch into
OBSOLETE
combat in the minimum amount of time, thoroughly prepared for the
operation and with the greatest amount of coordinated support available.
904. Rarely will there be enough time to prepare for battle. Good battle
procedure saves time without sacrificing thoroughness and is based on the
following considerations:
a. Knowledge. Platoon members must know their roles and be
practised in the procedures for all types of operations.
b. Anticipation. All members, particularly platoon commanders,
platoon sergeants and section commanders, must continually
appraise and re-appraise the battle-field situation with a view
to anticipating an involvement and thereby be prepared to meet
it.
c. Communication. Information must be passed through the
chain of command by the timely issue of warning orders, orders
and briefings.
d. Economy. Resources, in particular time and effort, must be eco-
nomically used.
e. Thoroughness. The platoon must commence the battle with
nothing left to chance. All important detail must be covered
during the preparation and as much minor detail as time will
allow. Rehearsed drills and SOPs can be employed to see that
nothing important is forgotten.
9–2
Sequence of Battle Procedure

905. An example of the sequence of battle procedure is shown in Annex
A to this chapter. Each operation will have its own variations. What is
important is that the sequence is logical and timely, and that as many
actions as possible occur concurrently.
SECTION 9-2. ROLES AND GROUPING
General
906. During battle procedure each platoon member will function in one
or more of the following groups; reconnaissance group (Rgp); orders group
(Ogp) and platoon body.
907. During the battle procedure every platoon member must at some
stage attend an OGp, whether at platoon or section level.
908. Rgp. The task of the Rgp is to obtain information, particularly on
the enemy and the ground. It must see without being seen, and therefore
must be as small as possible for the task. It will usually consist of the
platoon commander, his orderly/runner and perhaps another soldier for
OBSOLETE
protection. The orderly/runner and the soldier may act as guides for later
moves. An MFC or support company platoon representative may also be
included if it is necessary for them to view the ground or enemy first hand.
909. OGp. The platoon OGp usually consists of:
a. the platoon Rgp, minus any personnel included only for protec-
tion;
b. the section commanders;
c. the platoon sergeant (if available);
d. orderly/runner; and
e. signaller.
910. Where there are attached support company platoons or supporting
arms, the commanders or representatives of these sub-units may attend
the OGp, eg, MFC, APC section commander, section commander of an
engineer reconnaissance party.
911. When in a firm base or a secure area, and there is sufficient time or
the complexity of the operation warrants, the entire patrol or platoon may
attend the OGp in addition to the section commanders.
9–3
912. Platoon Body. The body consists of all those who are not involved
in either the R or O groups. The platoon body will act on previous warning
orders and orders to carry out designated tasks or, without further
instruction, prepare for battle.
SECTION 9-3. WARNING ORDER
913. If battle procedure is to achieve the goal of thorough and timely
preparation, the passage of information must be speedy and efficient.
Information and instructions must be quickly passed to all levels in the
chain of command. This allows for subordinates to get on with the
preparations which are their responsibility without waiting for detailed
orders.
914. Included in these preparations are reconnaissance, administration
and deployment. Whenever possible these activities should be conducted
concurrently in order to save time. This can be achieved through the issue
of warning orders.
915. To be effective a warning order should include:
a. a general outline of the task (secrecy, however, may preclude the
early announcement of the precise mission);
b.
c.
OBSOLETE
the time and rendezvous (RV) for the OGp;
timings or notice of move: and
d. administrative arrangements, including preliminary moves.
916. The warning order may also include additional reconnaissance
details such as any personnel required, other than those normally included
in the Rgp, and the limits of reconnaissance. Preliminary tasks, such as
the repositioning of fire support, may also be included.
917. Immediately the platoon commander receives a warning order he
prepares and issues his own warning order to his OGp. In order to avoid
unnecessary tension or fatigue, the platoon commander should quickly
complete a time and space appreciation, before he issues his warning
order, to calculate the earliest time that the platoon will be required to
undertake some major activity or move. Having calculated this he can
issue timings in the following manner: ‘NO MOVE BEFORE .... HOURS'
or ‘BE AT .... HOURS (or minutes) NOTICE TO MOVE FROM NOW (or
from a given time)'. This also allows for maximum time to be spent on
concurrent activity, eg, ‘weapon preparation, eating and resting'.
9–4
918. After issuing his warning order and before leaving for the company
OGp, the platoon commander will entrust the continued preparation,
preliminary moves, and perhaps relocation of fire support and target
adjustment to the platoon sergeant. If necessary, further instructions as to
the preparation and assembly of the platoon OGp may be issued, eg, the
construction of models and the issue of maps.
919. Section commanders will extract from the platoon warning order,
the relevant information and issue section warning orders. If there is time
available before the platoon OGp, they will supervise battle procedure.
Before they attend the platoon OGp, they will hand over control to their
section 2ICs.
SECTION 9-4. RECONNAISSANCE

920. The reconnaissance will provide much of the information on the
enemy and ground upon which the platoon commander will base his plan.
All operations call for the commander to look for the information pertinent
to that operation, eg, in the attack, routes, FUP and viable approaches
must be found; whereas in defence, fields of fire and weapon pit sites will
be pertinent. Whatever the operation, the platoon commander must plan
the reconnaissance to obtain the information required in the time
available.
921. OBSOLETE
Before conducting a reconnaissance the commander should:
a. obtain all the available information about the situation;
b. decide what he wants his reconnaissance to achieve;
c. conduct a map reconnaissance to get as much information as
possible about the ground, likely vantage points, routes and obsta-
cles; and
d. conduct a preliminary time and space appreciation to deter-
mine how much time he can afford to spend on the reconnais-
sance and still have time to formulate a plan, write orders, and
issue them. Time must be allowed for the orders to be passed
and acted upon by all subordinates.
922. Rarely will there be enough time for the commander to see all that
he would like to see. He must therefore give priorities to reconnoitering
those areas which he considers most promising from his map
reconnaissance.
923. The reconnaissance must be planned and executed to avoid
detection. In particular, the Rgp must not take casualties from its own
9–5
troops and supporting arms. The commander must ensure that the
platoon sergeant knows the reconnaissance plan and that the platoon is
careful not to fire nor adjust fire onto the Rgp.
SECTION 9-5. THE APPRECIATION
General
924. The commander must employ a logical process of reasoning to
arrive at a plan which will solve the problem and achieve the desired goal.
This process is the appreciation.
925. On the battlefield the junior leader will have little time to conduct
more than a mental appreciation and so he must discipline his mind to
think logically and not to allow his reasoning to be clouded by fear, fatigue,
hardship or other distractions. To assist in this process, the following
sequence should be followed:
a. Determine the Aim. There must be a clear understanding of
what goal or objective the solution must achieve.
b. Analyse the Factors. The known facts of the situation are ana-
lysed to produce the logical deductions which can be made in
consideration of the aim.
c.
OBSOLETE
Consider the Courses Open. The options derived from an analy-
sis of the factors are further weighed to arrive at the best course
of action.
d. Formulate the Plan. The best course of action is translated into
the commander's plan. The plan in turn forms the basis of the
commander's orders.
The Aim
926. The most important decision of the appreciation process is the
determination of the aim. If the aim selected is not what the commander or
his superiors really want to achieve, then the appreciation will be based on
a false foundation. Although it is the platoon commander's responsibility
to define the platoon aim, it will often be dictated by the company
commander.
927. Should the platoon be given a number of tasks to perform then the
most important task becomes the aim. Any other tasks or conditions
imposed upon how this goal is to be achieved become ‘limitations' to the
aim, but never become dual or multiple aims. Should one of these
limitations be a task requiring the solution of a later tactical problem then
a further appreciation will be required, once the immediate task has been
completed.
9–6
928. The aim must be clear, concise and positive. A platoon aim is
generally expressed in terms of:
a. to kill,
b. to capture,
c. to destroy,
d. to defend,
e. to advance, or
f. to withdraw.
929. The verb expressing the aim must clearly indicate the goal. Any
confusion must be clarified by the platoon commander at his superior's
OGp.
Factors - General
930. The aim having been determined, all available facts are examined
to see how they influence the achievement of the aim. The facts of an
immediate tactical problem facing the platoon will generally fall into four
main groups known as factors. They are:
a.
b. OBSOLETE
the enemy involved,
own troops available,
c. the ground over which the engagement will occur, and
d. the time and space available or required for the battle.
931. Other factors which may influence the problem and which it may
be necessary to consider separately are:
a. meteorology,
b. administration,
c. civilians,
d. morale, and
e. communications.
932. Examining the Facts. From the known facts of the situation, a
commander is able to deduce further details and information from which
he can work out a viable course of action. An example of this process is
shown in Annex A t o this chapter. Each fact is considered in relation to the
aim. Facts and information are fully considered and those that are
irrelevant are discarded. One fact may lead to a number of deductions, or a
9–7
number of facts provide one deduction. A simple test to be applied to a
deduction is to follow it with the question ‘So what?' If a further conclusion
can be drawn then the question may be answered: ‘Therefore .........'. The
better the intelligence available on the situation, the more appropriate the
resultant plan is likely to be.
Factors - Enemy
933. One aim of the enemy will be to deny the opposition intelligence.
The commander must utilise his knowledge of the enemy order of battle
(orbat) and tactics to make logical deductions from those facts available.
Typical questions about the enemy which the commander must answer
are:
a. Where is he?
b. What strength is he?
c. What is he doing?
d. What is he likely to do?
e. What weapons does he have?
f. What support does he have?
g.
h. OBSOLETE
How does this affect me?
How can I counter this?
Factors - Own Forces
934. The commander must know himself and his troops. He must know
the capabilities and employment of his platoon and its weapons, and those
of supporting platoons and arms. Using this knowledge and his knowledge
of the situation, the commander can deduce the best use of his resources
and predict the need for additional support. Generally he must work
within the resources allocated at the outset. In particular, the commander
balances his weapons against those of his enemy to maximise his firepower
against the opposing forces when and where it will be most advantageous.
Factors - Ground
935. Platoon and section commanders must develop an eye for the
ground. They must be capable of visualising the ground from their map,
the effects friendly and enemy weapons will have on it and how the battle
will be fought across it. The ground should be appreciated in the following
sequence:
a. ground general,
b. vital ground, and
c. approaches to the vital ground.
9–8
936. Ground General. The commander notes slope, vegetation,
obstacles and dominating features. Deductions such as the going for
infantry and armour, the fields of fire available to both sides, and thus
which areas to avoid or use can be made. During this examination,
attention is given to features which dominate the area and afford an
advantage to the side that occupies them, eg, the vital ground and the
ground covering approaches.
937. Vital Ground. The vital ground is: ‘Ground, the possession of
which by the enemy will seriously interfere with the successful defence of
the position' (JSP(AS)101-Glossary ). The vital ground for a platoon attack
is generally the area occupied by the enemy force. It will normally be the
job of the platoon to clear this area pit by pit with grenade and bayonet.
Should some area within the enemy position offer a marked advantage the
attackers should aim to possess it as soon as possible. The platoon in
defence must look to protect that area which, if taken by the enemy, would
prejudice the aim of the defence.
938. Key Terrain. Key terrain is: ‘Ground, the seizure or retention of
which affords a marked advantage to either combatant' (JSP(AS)101 ).
Key terrain is usually a knoll, high ground or a feature which it would be
OBSOLETE
advantageous to hold for purposes of deployment of weapons and troops, or
security or for cover. It could be an objective to be captured before the vital
ground can be attacked.
939. Vital Element. A platoon not only attacks and defends, but is
capable of executing many different types of operations in which a piece of
ground will not necessarily be the vital element, eg, the defence of a bridge
or installation, or a raid to capture an object or prisoner. Whatever the
operation, the commander must decide what element or object is vital to
achieving the aim and make his appreciation in consideration of
possessing or controlling this element or object.
940. When considering ground, the commander will be looking for
various requirements depending on the task at hand. Many aspects are
common to most tasks, and often must be looked at from the enemy's point
of view. Such aspects include:
a. fields of fire and distances,
b. going for both infantry and AFVs, and
c. obstacles and defiles.
9–9
941. Many of these common aspects will be considered mentally as the
commander looks for more specific task-related information. Examples are:
a. The Advance:
(1) main and alternate route(s);
(2) axis and centreline of advance;
(3) control features and bounds;
(4) holding areas for rear troops and troops in TCVs; and
(5) likely enemy held terrain and therefore target planning,
approaches to the enemy and fields of fire.
b. The Attack:
(1) vital ground, key terrain and objectives;
(2) approaches, ground covering approaches, going, fields of
fire;
(3) observation points;
(4) FUPs, routes to the FUPs, axes of assault;
(5) assembly areas;
OBSOLETE
(6)
(7)
(8)
distances for assault and depth troops;
frontages; and
location of fire support.
c. Defence. As for the attack but from the defender's point of view
with emphasis on:
(1) deployment of troops to ground,
(2) deployment of weapons to ground,
(3) observation, and
(4) field defences.
d. Withdrawal.
(1) withdrawal routes;
(2) control measures, including location of check-points and
RVs and holding areas; and
(3) going, day and night.
942. The above lists are not exhaustive and other operations, eg, relief in
place, night operations and assault river crossings will have their own
requirements for conduct of a ground appreciation.
9–10
943. By the completion of the reconnaissance, the commander must
have weighed the advantages and disadvantages of the ground and
considered certain options as to how he can use or combat them. At this
stage of the appreciation the commander will be conceiving some viable
courses of action. Before these options are fixed he must decide whether
they can be achieved in the time available.
Factors - Time and Space
944. Time and space available for the operation is analysed to determine
if considered options are feasible in the time given. The analysis requires
starting from a given time, such as ‘time now', or the time by which the
aim is to be achieved, and adding or subtracting in sequence the timings
for each activity that must occur before and after that activity.
945. These considerations can be applied to general, day-to-day
assessments, such as:
a. priorities of work;
b. coordination of support, eg transport timings;
c. movement planning;
OBSOLETE
d. training schedules; and
e. tactical problems.
946. In the offensive and defensive operations, each specific type of
operation has important timings, apart from the general times listed
above. Examples are:
a. The Advance. The commander will consider times by which he
is to advance to given objectives, when to secure or clear them
and methods of movement. He will need to know basic planning
times, such as rates of advance, by foot, APC or TCV, by day and
night.
b. The Attack. The commander will be given objectives to secure or
clear by a certain time, and will have to plan movement from as-
sembly areas to FUPs, and onto the objective. He will need to
know basic times such as the rates of advance, how long is re-
quired to fight through an objective and how long to reorganise.
Timings for registration of indirect fire support, movement of
fire units and coordination with infantry and armoured units is
of critical importance.
c. Defence. In occupying a defensive position, a primary consider-
ation is to devise a priority of effort between patrolling, digging
in and developing the defence to various stages. He will need to
know time requirements such as how long it will take to dig in,
9–11
the demand for patrols made on his troops, and when to have
the position defended by.
d. Withdrawal. The withdrawal is an operation which is heavily
dependent on coordinated times for success. It will frequently
involve coordination of fire support, with a planned order of
movement of troops and marrying up with transport at specific
times and places. Timings the commander will need to know
are, for example, the time until he must deny the position to the
enemy, when to start thinning out, and when to be clear of the
position, or pass through given check points or RVs.
947. The timings as laid down in the plan, especially with regard to fire
support, are vital and must be met, however the plan must be flexible to
permit changes to meet unexpected events. Practice of battle procedures
will ensure concurrent action, minimal delays and maximum preparation.
948. The appreciation of time and space will often lead to the exclusion
of certain courses of action or approaches.
Courses Open
OBSOLETE
949. The courses of action open to both the enemy and the friendly
commander must be evaluated to determine:
a. the most likely enemy action and hence the best course to adopt
to achieve the aim, or
b. enemy reaction (and if necessary any subsequent friendly reac-
tions required).
950. The commander must first consider the courses open to the side
that has the initiative, eg, in the attack and ambush, his course of action
and the likely enemy reaction; and in the defence, the enemy action and
the best reaction with which he can counter it.
951. The advantages and disadvantages of each option open to the
commander must be weighed to produce the best course of action.
Plan
952. The best course of action is translated into the commander's plan,
which in turn forms the basis of orders and thus follows a similar format:
a. Mission. The aim of the appreciation defines the mission.
b. Execution. The tasks to be allocated to sub-units are derived
from the deductions made during the consideration of the fac-
tors. The essential elements of coordination, eg timings, H hour,
9–12
FUP, LD, routes, and priorities of work; can be extracted from
the analysis made of the various factors.
c. Command and Signals or Administration and Logistics. At pla-
toon level it will not be normal for elements which fall into the
‘command and signals' or ‘administration and logistics' catego-
ries to form a keystone of the plan or be so peculiar as to warrant
special listing.
953. The plan must achieve the aim of the appreciation and it must
comply with whatever orders, if any, initiated the appreciation. It is
essential that the aim is correct and that it be used to test the factors
during the appreciation.
SECTION 9-6. ORDERS

General
954. Orders are the means by which the platoon commander
communicates his plan and intentions to his subordinates. At the
completion of orders, the participants must know exactly what is to be
achieved, how it is to be achieved and what role they must play. If the
OBSOLETE
mission is to succeed, then the orders must be issued in a timely and
efficient manner. At platoon level this is usually done verbally. Orders
must be understood and be capable of being effected.
955. Platoon orders may be initiated solely by the platoon commander or
as a result of company orders. No matter at what level in the chain of
command the initiation occurs, it is the duty of each successive commander
to extract the relevant detail, appreciate the situation and issue a set of
orders relevant to his command.
Sequence
956. Orders must be given in a logical sequence and must include all the
necessary detail. They must be passed quickly, making the maximum use
of warning orders, and include only the relevant detail. The following
sequence is adopted:
a. Explanation of Model and/or Topography.
(1) Situation. The facts of the situation are given under the
headings ‘Enemy', ‘Own Forces' and ‘Ground'.
(2) Mission. There must be a clear and concise statement of
the mission, which is derived directly from the ‘Aim'of the
appreciation.
9–13
(3) Execution. The description of how the mission is to be car-
ried out must include the allocation of specific tasks and
the coordinating detail peculiar to the plan.
(4) Administration and Logistics. The administrative and lo-
gistical requirements of the mission must include any-
thing additional to those covered by SOPs.
(5) Command and Signals. That detail peculiar to the plan
and not covered by SOPs eg, location of platoon headquar-
ters, reorganisation, signals, and the synchronisation of
watches must be included.
Detailed Content
957. Each type of operation will require a slight variation to the
information detailed under each heading. An example of that detail and a
comparative table is contained in MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.2, Infantry
Commanders Aide-Memoire. No list can cover every single contingency. It
is up to the commander to see that his orders contain the necessary detail.
The information that is given to the subordinate commander must be
sufficient for him to continue the designated plan and achieve the mission
should the commander become a casualty.
OBSOLETE
Presentation
958. When presenting orders, the commander must take into
consideration:
a. the time available for:
(1) presentation;
(2) dissemination; and
(3) implementation of orders
b. the level of comprehension of his OGp; and
c. the level of training of his command. The more experienced and
well trained the platoon, the less the detail likely to be neces-
sary in orders as more aspects will fall within SOPs.
959. No matter what the level or standard of the command, there are
some basic rules which ensure effective presentation:
a. Orders must be given clearly, calmly and confidently.
b. Nothing relevant must be omitted, nothing irrelevant included.
c. Interruptions are not allowed.
9–14
d. Allow time for orders to be considered and questions asked.

e. Question members of the OGp on important elements of their
orders to ensure that they understand them.
f. If time allows, take notes during long orders and conversely
make notes for the presentation of long orders. Refer to notes to
ensure accuracy, where necessary.
g. If possible arrange for the OGp to look over the ground first
hand. If this is not possible, utilise maps, air photographs, dirt
and mud models.
960. Security of the OGp is vital. It should be conducted in an area where
it can be afforded protection by the platoon or sentries and which is
accessible and central to those attending. The routes in and out should be
covered from fire and from view and, where possible, the location should be
defilade to any immediate fire fight. It may be necessary for a commander,
particularly a section commander, to issue his orders to separate groups or
individuals and to relay brief orders to others.
Patrol and Ambush Orders
961. If there is sufficient time, patrol and ambush orders are best
OBSOLETE
delivered to an OGp consisting of the entire platoon or patrol. The check
lists for patrol and ambush orders are contained in the MLW Two, Inf Trg
3.3, Patrolling and Tracking and MLW Two, Inf Trg 3.4, Ambush and
Counter Ambush respectively.
Snap Orders and Radio Orders
962. Snap orders are an abbreviated form of orders given when the
situation demands immediate action. The exact content of snap orders
cannot be listed, as it depends on the situation. For example a section
commander may be ordered to, ‘CLEAR THAT SHED'. How he does it is
left to him, but speed is essential. Another example is when the platoon
commander has more, but still limited time for reconnaissance and issue of
orders. In this case he gives only the essential guidance to his section
commanders. He would still follow the same sequence as full orders but
may well delete most of the paragraphs, such as Situation, Administration
and Logistics and Command and Signals. These orders will be verbal. In
many situations a section commander may achieve the best results by
snap orders such as, `GUN GROUP COVER US FROM
THAT EMBANKMENT'. When this group is in position he orders,
‘RIFLE GROUP FOLLOW ME'.
9–15
963. Radio orders are given when distance, time or the situation
prevents the assembly of an OGp. They may be either a complete sequence
of orders, or more in the nature of snap orders. In many situations, eg
during mechanised operations, or during operations over a wide area,
radio may well be the normal means of issuing orders. They may be
additional to a formal OGp and could be confirmatory in nature, ie confirm
or make final adjustments to previous orders, once a particular situation
has been clarified.
964. Regardless of the reason for using radio orders, they must be
concise, clear and used only when necessary, as enemy EW will be a
distinct threat.
Annex: A. Sequence of Battle Procedure
OBSOLETE
9–16
OBSOLETE
9A–1
ANNEX A TO
CHAPTER 9
SEQUENCE OF BATTLE PROCEDURE

Situation Arises Flow of information and
sequence of action.
Coy Wng O Pl Wng O Sect Wng O

Start Battle Start Battle Start Battle
Procedure Procedure Procedure
Coy Comd Recon,

Apprec, Plan.
Prep of Orders
Pl Comd attends
Coy 'O' Gp
Coy 'O' Gp
Coy Comd Recon,

Apprec, Plan.
Prep of Orders
OBSOLETE Pl 'O' Gp
Sect Comd
attends Pl 'O' Gp
Coy Comd Recon,

Apprec, Plan.
Prep of Orders
Section 'O'
Gp
Execute Execute Execute

Plan Plan Plan
Flow of information and sequence of action.

Notes: 1. Battle procedure may include administration
ammunition, weapons check, feeding, resting,
medical checks, stores issue, supervision of progress,
reconnaissance, appreciations, preparation of orders,
issue of orders and preliminary moves.
2. PI Sgt and Sect 2ICs comd pl and sects respectively
when comds at OGp, recon etc, and prepare maps.
9A–2
OBSOLETE
10–1
CHAPTER 10
NEGOTIATING OBSTACLES
SECTION 10-1 GENERAL
1001. The crossing of major obstacles will normally be planned at
battalion level or higher. As platoons and sections will be involved, their
commanders and soldiers must know the various methods of crossing or
breaching these obstacles. Major obstacles include:
a. rivers, streams and canals;
b. wire;
c. minefields; and
d. contaminated areas
1002. When the obstacles covering an enemy position are ineffective, and
inadequately covered by fire, a quick attack may be the most decisive
action. Should the obstacles be extensive and covered by effective fire, it
will be necessary to either:
OBSOLETE
a. outflank or bypass them, or
b. carry out a deliberate breaching or crossing operation using
special equipment.
1003. This chapter covers the assault, crossing and deliberate breaching
of obstacles at platoon level. The deliberate breaching or crossing of
obstacles at company and battalion level is described in MLW Two, Inf Trg
1.1 The Infantry Battalion. General considerations concerning the crossing
of natural and artificial obstacles are described in MLW Two, Inf Trg 3.2
Fieldcraft and Target Detection.
SECTION 10-2. GAPPING WIRE OBSTACLES

Methods of Making Gaps
1004. Wire obstacles will usually be covered by fire and encountered in
the last stages of an attack. Methods of making gaps in wire include:
a. Artillery and Mortar Fire. The effectiveness of artillery and
mortar fire is limited, especially against low wire entangle-
ments. It will make gaps in the wire but will not clear lanes suf-
ficiently large for an infantry assault. This method may be
useful in a quick attack where wire is not extensive.
b. Tanks Firing Cannister Ammunition at Short Range.
Cannister ammunition can clear wire obstacles effectively, es-
pecially in open country.
10–2
c. Wire Cutters. Wire cutters are effective for cutting gaps in wire
before a major breach is made, or for clearing the last strands of
wire. The leading sections may have to go to ground to give cov-
ering fire to a gapping party.
d. Bangalore Torpedo. Assault pioneer gapping parties may ac-
company assaulting platoons or sections and blow gaps using
Bangalore Torpedoes. Gapping parties should be covered by in-
direct and direct fire support. A Bangalore Torpedo can blow a
gap in a wire obstacle 3m wide and 6-8 m deep.
e. Use of Bridging Expedients. Leading sections may carry mate-
rial which can be thrown over wire obstacles to form bridges.
1005. Mines and Booby Traps. Both anti-personnel and anti-tank
mines are likely to be laid in wire obstacles or immediately in front of or
behind them. The type and density of the mines should be determined
during the ground reconnaissance. The platoon commander may need to
combine his gapping operation with a minefield breaching operation. The
breaching of minefields is described in Section 10-3. If mines are laid in
wire obstacles it is likely that booby traps are also in use. A taut wire must
not be cut nor a loose wire pulled until it has been investigated for booby
traps.
OBSOLETE
1006. Gaps. The method of passing through gaps will vary according to
the number of gaps. The ideal is one gap for each of the leading assault
sections. There should be at least one gap for each platoon. If the covering
fire is coming from outside the platoon, sections should quickly break
formation, double through the gap, and reform. When covering fire is
limited, enemy opposition may force sections to pass through gaps
employing fire and movement.
1007. Types of Obstacles. The designs of wire obstacles used by the
Australian Army are described in MLW Two, Eng Trg 2.2 Obstacles and
Field Defences. The basic design of those used by the enemy will be
similar.
SECTION 10-3. BREACHING MINEFIELDS
General
1008. Minefields may be encountered anywhere on the battlefield, but
are usually employed in defence, to deny approaches to enemy positions
or to channel assaulting troops into killing areas. To use them as an effective
obstacle the enemy will normally cover them with fire. For crossing
large minefields a minefield breaching operation will be necessary.
Enemy minefields may not be marked and the enemy may cause delay
by using dummy marking, forcing troops to clear an area that has not been
mined.
10–3
1009. Small groups of nuisance mines may be encountered anywhere. A
low density minefield, ie, one with only a few mines per metre of front, or
an anti-tank minefield, may be crossed on foot without a special breaching
operation. Casualties caused by walking through such a minefield will
often be less than those caused by enemy fire during a breaching
operation.
1010. Mine Incident Drill. During dismounted operations, when the
platoon is out of contact with the enemy, the following drill should be
adopted when a mine is detonated causing casualties:
a. On detonation everyone remains motionless.
b. The commander confirms the number, location and condition of
the casualties. Information is passed verbally or by field signal.
c. The radio operator requests casualty evacuation (CASEVAC)
and sends initial report of incident.
d. Use bayonets to prod to and around casualties. Mark all proven
lanes.
e. Where possible apply initial first aid to casualties.
f. The commander nominates troops to maintain observation, all
OBSOLETE
other troops not immediately involved will prod and make a
safe area for CASEVAC.
g. Extraction of casualties will be along marked lanes.
Methods of Breaching a Minefield
1011. Minefields may be breached by the use of mine detectors and
prodders, or by the use of explosives.
1012. Use of Mine Detectors and Prodders. Breaching parties made
up of infantry or engineers using mine detectors and/or prodders work in
darkness or under covering fire to make safe lanes through the field. A safe
lane for infantry is from 1 to 2 m wide and is marked by string or tape.
1013. Use of Explosives. Minefield safe lanes may be cleared by using
prepared explosive charges such as the Projected Line Charge (PLC) or
Bangalore Torpedoes. The PLC, which provides a rapid means of clearing
narrow lanes through minefields, consists of an explosive-filled hose which
is projected over the mined area and then exploded. Small PLCs will clear
a path about 1.3 m wide through most minefields. With large PLCs, a path
up to 1m wide may be achieved. PLCs are not suitable for use in areas
where the line will be held clear of the ground by obstructions such as
vegetation and fences and may also prove ineffective against deeply-buried
or blast-proof mines. The current in-service PLC equipment is described in
MLW Two, Eng Trg 2.5 Mine Warfare and Booby Traps. The Bangalore
Torpedo is discussed in MLW Two, Eng Trg 2.4 Demolitions.
10–4
Lanes
1014. Ideally, one lane is required for each of the leading assault sections.
If this is not possible, there should be at least one lane for each platoon.
1015. The methods for passing through the cleared lanes are the same as
for passing through gaps in wire. Further detail on mine clearing is
detailed in MLW Two, Eng Trg 2.5 Mine Warfare and Booby Traps.
SECTION 10-4. NEGOTIATING WATER OBSTACLES

General
1016. When a water obstacle is encountered, the commander of the
leading troops must initiate a reconnaissance to obtain information which
will enable him to:
a. provide a report on the obstacle to his commander, and
b. determine a means of getting his own men and their equipment
to the far bank with the minimum delay.
1017. Selection of Crossing Places. The following points should be
OBSOLETE
considered when selecting a crossing place for an improvised crossing,
when boats are not available:
a. As wider portions of the waterway are likely to be shallower and
have weaker current, poor swimmers can often make easier
crossings in these areas.
b. It is easier to cross from a point jutting out into the stream; if
possible, where the flow of the current is towards the far bank.
c. High banks on the far shore are an indication of deep water and
may make it difficult for the men to leave the water. Deep water
on the near bank is not such a problem as it is negotiated before
the men get too tired
d. Shallow water or sandbars in the centre of the stream provide
an opportunity for reorganisation and rest. They will also en-
able men to regain their feet if they have been swept away, or to
recuperate if they are exhausted.
e. Crossing should be made an an angle of about 800 mils down-
stream as shown in Figure 10-1
10–5
Current takes Swimmers

Exit Point
to the Far Bank
Avoid High Banks
which indicate Fast
800 mls Water
Entry Point
Broader and therefore

Usually Shallower Stream
Current
Flow
OBSOLETE
Figure 10-1. Crossing at 800 mils Downstream
Methods of Crossing.
1018. Wading. To wade across a stream, face upstream and lean against
the current whilst moving crabwise across the stream. A stick about 2 m
long will often help. Do not attempt to wade directly across a swiftly
flowing stream at right angles to the current. The current will eventually
sweep one foot in front of the other, resulting in loss of balance and the
danger of being swept away.
1019. Hand Lines. When wading is dangerous, toggle ropes or rifle
slings may be linked together to provide a hand line. A hand line will help
prevent soldiers who lose their footing from being swept away, and gives
confidence to weak swimmers.
10–6
1020. Floats. Floats can be used to assist soldiers to cross a water
obstacle. They can enable a comparatively long water crossing to be made
with the minimum of fatigue by the swimmers, who, on arriving at the far
bank, will have dry clothing and equipment to put on. They can also be
used to support a weak swimmer and as a means of getting equipment
across or keeping it dry. There are many ways of improvising floatation
aids. Figure 10-2 shows some methods others may be improvised.
Pack/Equipment wrapped in Shelter.

Weapon on top, ready for
Empty Jerri cans
instant use.
OBSOLETE
Empty Water bottle tied or
in sandbags
Lashed logs, bamboo or other
buoyant materials
Legs tied off Tyre

to trap air tubes
Figure 10-2. Improvised Floatation Aids

10–7
1021. Swimming. Swimming is only suitable for very short distances. In
the event of an individual getting into difficulties in the water he should
swim with the current, easing himself out of it to either bank as
appropriate. On no account should he try to swim against the current. It is
important that every soldier in the platoon be taught to swim. When there
are non-swimmers in the platoon, they should be paired with swimmers
and assisted by a float.
1022. Crossing Over an Obstacle. After an assault crossing or when
there is little or no risk of enemy interference, rope bridges above the water
may be used. The construction of rope bridges is described in MLW Two,
Engr Trg 2.1 Obstacle Crossing and Mobility.
1023. Tactical Considerations. The following tactical considerations
should be observed when water obstacles are being negotiated:
a. Bank Protection Party. A bank protection party must be estab-
lished to cover the commander's initial reconnaissance.
b. Covering Group. A covering group must be provided for the ini-
tial crossing. This may well be provided by the bank protection
party.
OBSOLETE
c. MG. An MG should be established on the far bank as soon as
possible.
d. Lifeline. Depending on the width and depth of the waterway
and the strength of the current it may be necessary to establish
a lifeline.
e. Assembly Area. An assembly area in which to prepare floatation
equipment is essential.
f. Far Bank Protection Section. The section commander of the far
bank protection section and the platoon commander should be
established on the far bank before floatation of equipment
starts.
g. The Home Bank. The platoon sergeant is responsible for secu-
rity of the assembly area and the preparation of floatation
equipment. He is responsible for the coordination of the home
bank until he crosses. The platoon sergeant should cross last
and report completion of the crossing to the platoon com-
mander.
1024. Watermanship. Platoon and section commanders should study
and practise watermanship. Deciding where to cross and land, and
launching a boat into a stream call for knowledge of the effect of a current
on a boat and of the characteristics of such features as banks, bends and
10–8
pools. Handling a boat in a difficult current and landing on a steep bank
need careful training and practice. Further details are contained in MLW
2, Engr Trg 2.1, Obstacle Crossing and Mobility
SECTION 10-5 CONTAMINATED AREAS

General
1025. Contaminated areas include those which have been subject to NBC
attack. When a platoon has to cross a contaminated area, protective
measures as discussed in Section 8-5 should be employed.
OBSOLETE
11–1
PART THREE-TACTICS
CHAPTER 11. ADVANCE AND PURSUIT
The Advance
1101. The advance is a mobile operation in which the platoon moves as
part of a larger force to close with the enemy. The aim of the advance is to:
a. destroy the enemy,
b. force an enemy withdrawal,
c. seize tactically important ground,
d. seize or maintain the initiative, or
e. deceive the enemy.
1102. There are two types of advance:
a. The advance to Contact. In the advance to contact the emphasis
OBSOLETE
is on wide reconnaissance to find the enemy positions and de-
termine their strength. The main part of the advancing force is
uncommitted and ready for action. Speed and bold action will be
necessary to forestall enemy reaction.
b. The advance in Contact. During an advance in contact the aim
is to maintain pressure on the enemy, to harass him continu-
ously and to prevent him from breaking contact and settling
into a defensive position. These will often involve night opera-
tions. The enemy must be denied the opportunity to regain the
initiative. This can be best achieved by speed, surprise and ag-
gressive planning and action.
The Pursuit
1103. The pursuit is a form of advance. A platoon in the pursuit will move
as fast as is tactically sound and will act as in any other advance. Company
orders will include instructions on the action to be taken on making
contact with the enemy, eg leading platoons may be ordered to report on
and then bypass enemy parties of nominated sizes. The speed of the
pursuit at platoon level can also be increased by mounting infantry in
vehicles, particularly A vehicles or aircraft. Typical platoon tasks could be
to continue advancing in contact and maintain pressure on the enemy;
dealing with bypassed pockets of enemy; acting in a cut off role, especially
while mounted in APCs or in helicopters, and administrative tasks such as
handling prisoners of war or guarding secured areas.
11–2
1104. When the enemy has been forced to withdraw he should be routed
by bold and aggressive action in a pursuit. For a platoon there is little
difference between an advance and a pursuit, therefore they will be
considered jointly.
1105. In order to execute the platoon's role in the advance the
commander must understand the operation as it applies to the battalion,
as this is the smallest force that will undertake an advance. This
information is detailed in MLW Two, Inf Trg 1.1, The Infantry Battalion.
Advancing Force Grouping
1106. The general groupings of an advancing force are illustrated in
Figure 11-1.
Covering Force
OBSOLETE
Vanguard
Advance Guard
Main Guard
Flank Guard
Main Body
Rear Guard
Figure 11-1. Grouping of the Advanced Forces

11–3
Groups and Tasks

1107. An advancing force is divided into five major groups, each with a
defined task:
a. Covering Force. A covering force provides reconnaissance
across the front of the advancing force. It seeks out the main en-
emy force and obtains information so that the main force can be
applied against those objectives most likely to lead to the de-
struction of the enemy. The covering force is normally provided
and controlled by the senior headquarters. To maintain mo-
mentum it usually bypasses minor opposition.
b. Advance Guard. The advance guard clears away minor opposi-
tion in front of the main body and exploits any enemy weakness
discovered by the covering force. The leading element of the ad-
vance guard is called the vanguard while the remainder is the
mainguard. The advance guard maintains momentum and the
initiative through its aggressive action, keeping the enemy off
guard and allowing the main body to prepare for the delivery of
major blows.
c.
OBSOLETE
Main Body. The main body provides the main fighting strength
of the advancing force and supplies periodic changes of ad-
vance, flank and rear guards.
d. Flank Guard. A flank guard gives early warning of an enemy
threat from a flank. It then acts to block or to slow down such a
threat, and to prevent small-arms fire being directed against
the main body.
e. Rear Guard. The rear guard protects the main body from sur-
prise attack from the rear and forms the link with any other
force following.
Battalion Deployment
1108. While each advance will result in a particular grouping and
balance of forces, a typical battalion deployment in the advance is detailed
in Figure 11-2.
11–4
Vanguard
Coy Comd
Arty F.O.
Spt Sect Battalion

Advance
Guard
Battalion Engr Recon
Main Guard Party
OBSOLETE CO
Armd LO
Mor
Engr Rep
BC and
Party
Battalion
Main Body
Mors
Rear Guard
Figure 11-2. Typical Battalion Deployment in the Advance

11–5
Platoon and Section Roles
1109. During an advance, platoons and sections may be called on to act
as:
a. the point section, the leading section of the leading platoon;
b. the leading platoon, the battalion vanguard (there may be two
leading platoons);
c. part of the company in the mainguard;
d. part of the company in the main body;
e. the flank platoon (or section), the battalion flank guard or part
of it; or
f. the rear platoon (or section), the battalion rear guard or part of
it
Stages
1110. The advance is considered in two stages:
a. the preparatory stage which is essentially battle procedure, and
OBSOLETE
b. the conduct stage.
SECTION 11-2. THE PREPARATORY STAGE

General
1111. The major appreciation and planning for the conduct of the
advance is made at battalion headquarters and higher, but the platoon
commander must also appreciate and plan. He must ensure that the
platoon can not only meet the battalion or company commander's plan, but
quickly react to unforeseen contingencies. The platoon must be well
briefed, rehearsed and equipped so that the coordinated response
necessary to seize the initiative during the advance can be made quickly.
The orders given during this stage will have a great bearing during the
conduct stage.
1112. During both stages of the advance the basic considerations for the
platoon are:
a. control,
b. rate of advance,
c. firepower, and
d. protection.
11–6
Control
1113. Control during the advance is essential and depends on:
a. a simple clear cut plan and orders based on timely and accurate
information,
b. good battle procedure and communications, and
c. the platoon commander moving well forward.
1114. Control Measures. During the advance, various measures are
used to assist in control:
a. LD. The LD is the point from which the leading platoon com-
mences the advance. A force will normally adopt their advance
formation before crossing this line.
b. Axis. The axis is the general line astride which the platoon will
move. The platoon headquarters will follow this line. The pla-
toon axis will normally be ordered by the company commander.
It may be in the same direction but not on the same axis as the
OBSOLETE
main force and could be a bearing, feature or road.
c. Bounds. Bounds are tactical features which can be defended if
necessary. The platoon will not normally halt on a bound unless
ordered to do so, but will approach and pass over it with caution.
The leading, flank or rear sections report each platoon bound
clear of enemy and then continue the advance. The platoon
commander relays the information on company bounds to the
company commander. The platoon commander may select in-
termediate platoon bounds between those laid down by the
company commander. If a platoon is ordered to halt to conform
to a situation elsewhere, or to rest, it should do so on a bound.
d. Report Lines. Report lines are used for controlling and monitor-
ing the location and rate of advance of advancing elements.
They have no tactical significance except that they are chosen to
conform with easily recognisable features, such as road junc-
tions and streams. In close country and in bad going, bounds
may be close together and thus reduce the need for report lines.
The passing of report lines is reported in the same manner as
bounds. Both are given nick-names for ease of reporting and se-
crecy. The report lines are selected by the company commander
11–7
but the platoon commander may order his own as well, al-
though this would be unusual.
1115. Position of Commanders. The platoon commander must be in a
position to assume control of the battle if the leading or flank sections are
unable to overcome opposition quickly. By moving centrally and close
behind the leading section(s) he can bring quick, coordinated fire onto any
enemy. The platoon commander must be careful not to overcommit his
platoon. The commander of the leading platoon must resist the temptation
to lead the advance or rush forward and take over the section commander's
role at the first shot. The location of section commanders in relation to
their platoon commander and platoon sergeant is important. It is usual for
section commanders of the leading and flank sections to move behind their
scouts. Ground and/or vegetation will determine the best positions for
control and observation, however, as little time and exposure as possible
should be spent on contact moving to the platoon commander. The platoon
sergeant normally travels centrally in the rear of the platoon formations.
When a platoon is moving as part of a company formation, the company
commander may require his depth platoon commanders to move closer to
him, or be in the headquarters itself.
OBSOLETE
1116. Formations. Formations are chosen with regard to task, terrain
and rate of advance. The leading platoon(s) must be able to develop
maximum firepower in the direction of the enemy and to clear a path for
the rest of the advance. The platoon commander must retain control of his
sections at all times, changing formation smoothly and speedily to
accommodate terrain and obstacles. Pre-arranged field signals for platoon
formations, obstacle crossings, and battle formation will enhance control.
Platoon and section formations are described in Chapter 6 of this pamphlet
and field signals are described in MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.1, The Infantry
Soldiers Handbook.
1117. Contact Man. The leading platoon must maintain visual contact
with other elements of the company to the rear and flanks. Nominated
soldiers in the flank and rear sections must be tasked to maintain contact.
In this way, leading platoons can be kept aligned, and if necessary, cover
each other's movement with the minimum of radio traffic. The advance
must be smooth, avoiding concertinaing, particularly in close country.
1118. Scouts. The role of the scout is to provide early warning to an
advancing section or platoon and pass back information without being
seen. The correct use of scouts is vital in the considerations of control, rate
of advance and protection. They may be placed well forward in open
terrain or to the flanks when those areas are not completely open and
11–8
known, or may harbour enemy. Scouts must not mask the fire of the
platoon.
Rate of Advance
1119. In many ways, at platoon level, the conduct of the advance will
resemble that of a patrol. One important difference is the rate of advance.
This will rarely be left to the platoon commander to decide but will be
ordered by his company commander. The platoon commander must
supervise this rate.
1120. Quite often this rate will be faster than that which would be
adopted during an independent platoon patrol. While security is not to be
prejudiced nor casualties taken unnecessarily, the momentum of the
advance must be maintained and the time and space considerations of the
force's mission given priority.
1121. If the advance is to be rapid, the scouts and the platoon may be
forced to use tracks and less dense going unless the area is particularly
open. In this case vehicles, particularly A vehicles, may be allocated to the
advancing force or groups, especially the advance guard. Notwithstanding,
increased speed will decrease the thoroughness of reconnaissance. If
movement off tracks in close country is unacceptably slow, only likely
OBSOLETE
enemy positions may be reconnoitred. Particular attention must be paid to
the area immediately covering the road or track being used as the axis.
1122. In open country, a rapid rate of advance will not create such a
difficult balance between security and speed because the platoon can be
deployed on a wide frontage with one or two sections forward. During a
rapid advance in open country, a change in vegetation, a river, or other
obstacle can channel or slow the platoon. Changes in formation and
movement will ensure security and speed are maintained.
1123. Whatever the conditions the platoon and section commanders must
continually study the map and ground to appreciate the going, avoid
unnecessary pauses and dangerous ground, and anticipate enemy action
and their subsequent counter actions. They must not permit the risk of
casualties among leading scouts to influence the rate of advance unduly.
There are usually fewer casualties during an advance than in other
operations.
Firepower
1124. The platoon must always be prepared to bring the maximum
volume of fire against enemy positions. This includes not only the platoon
firepower, but that of supporting platoons and arms. Artillery and mortar
DF tasks should be determined during the preparatory stage and made
11–9
known to all commanders. A quick, heavy weight of fire onto the enemy
will allow the platoon to neutralise the enemy position and to seize the
initiative with bold, aggressive action and minimum casualties.
1125. Likely enemy positions must be approached in a battle deployment.
The deployment must include the standby of supporting mortar and
artillery fire and the positioning of support platoons such as the anti
armour or MG platoon. Other flanking platoons and the company support
section may be in a position to assist. This coordination of firepower will
either be pre-arranged or will be arranged by the company commander on
request from the platoon commander.
1126. The company commander will often move the attached FO, MFC
and other elements with the leading platoon, and in the case of a battle
group advance, tank and armoured vehicle firepower will be available. The
platoon commander may also have access to naval and air firepower.
Protection
1127. A platoon is often tasked with the protection of the main body.
Protection provided must be as thorough in the reconnaissance and
searching of its axis and sector as other considerations, such as the rate of
OBSOLETE
advance and ground will allow. It must not be ambushed and must ensure
the remainder of the force is not ambushed. Security is a particular
problem in close country, and in open country when the enemy has
increased mobility.
1128. The leading section(s) is responsible for security to the front and the
immediate flanks of the main body. In close country this includes
searching trees for snipers. Flank and rear sections must guard the flanks
and rear of the platoon respectively. The vanguard platoon will be
responsible for security to the front and flanks, normally to a nominated
distance, of the main guard. As in patrolling, each individual must search
his arc of responsibility.
1129. When an air threat exists, air defence sentries must be nominated
from rear sections. When a tank threat exists, tanks and anti-armour
weapons should be moved well forward during the advance and sited for
protection at halts.
1130. Whenever a platoon halts during the advance it adopts a defensive
posture (Section 8-2).
Advancing with Armoured Support
1131. An advance with armoured support requires a high degree of
infantry/armour cooperation. The information required at platoon level to
11–10
enable infantry to cooperate with tanks and APC's is provided in Chapters
2 and 7 of this pamphlet, and MLW One 2.2, The Battle Group.
SECTION 11-3. CONDUCT OF THE ADVANCE

General
1132. Many of the platoon's actions during the advance, such as moving
between bounds, obstacle crossings and action on contact, will be decided
upon and rehearsed during the preparatory stage. Platoon and section
commanders must continually appreciate the situation and the ground. In
this manner the platoon will not be slowed or drawn into an unfavourable
battle situation, and will maintain momentum and inflict casualties on the
enemy.
Aspects of Specific Tasks
1133. Leading Platoon. The enemy will attempt to impose delay by using
positions sited in depth in front of the advance. These positions can impose
a delay quite disproportionate to their size. The leading platoon must
prevent the enemy from withdrawing to fight again by cutting them off
and destroying them. The leading platoon must maintain the momentum
of the advance, destroy the delaying enemy and retain the initiative. To
achieve this the following points should be noted:
a.
OBSOLETE
Lead sections and scouts should be changed periodically to help
maintain the speed of the advance. Rear sections must be in vi-
sual or voice contact of platoon headquarters to ensure quick de-
ployment.
b. Leading sections neutralise isolated enemy posts using contact
drills or by firing pre-arranged DF tasks. This immediate action
is followed by a quick attack. Larger forces are destroyed
through the use of firepower and manoeuvre as appreciated by
the platoon commander and as laid down in orders during the
preparatory phase.
c. The section in contact should try to define the strength and lim-
its of a position which is too strong for it to attack. This is done
from a hasty defensive position.
d. As soon as contact occurs the platoon commander must move
forward to observe the action and gain information from the
section commanders. He must also keep the company com-
mander informed.
e. At the onset of combat, those sections not immediately involved
deploy into all round defence and await further orders.
f. If the point section cannot overcome the opposition, the platoon
commander appreciates the situation and decides if the task is
11–11
within the platoon's capabilities. By this time the company
commander should have arrived to assist if necessary.
g. If the task is within the capabilities of the platoon, a quick at-
tack must be launched in coordination with all available fire
support. It is important that the platoon keeps the company
fully informed about actions and intentions. Plans must be
cleared with the company commander.
h. If the task is beyond the platoon's capabilities, the platoon
adopts a defensive position to contain the enemy and to cover
the deployment of the company. Pressure continues to be ap-
plied to the enemy through probing and patrols to gain further
information on the enemy strength, disposition and likely in-
tentions.
1134. Flank Platoon. The speed of the flank platoon must not hinder
the speed of the advance. Although the platoon may be advancing parallel
to the main body it must be vigilant all round and be prepared to fight in
any direction. It is normal for the flank platoon to remain under company
control and not be detached under battalion control.
OBSOLETE
1135. Rear Platoon. The rear platoon must be prepared to fight to
either flank as well as to the rear.
11–12
OBSOLETE
12–1
CHAPTER 12
ATTACK
Introduction
1201. The aim of an attack is to close with and destroy the enemy or to
capture terrain. This is done by a combination of fire and movement.
1202. The attack may be launched by day or night. It may be noisy (with
full fire support) or be silent (to achieve surprise). Silent attacks can only
take place when visibility is poor, eg, in fog, at night, or in close country.
Types of Attack
1203. Attacks are termed ‘quick' or ‘deliberate' depending on the degree of
preparation of the enemy position which in turn dictates the degree of
preparation necessary to destroy it. This chapter describes in detail the
requirements of the attack. In the quick attack the platoon commander's
mental appreciation and verbal orders will follow essentially the same
OBSOLETE
process, modified because of the urgency of the situation.
1204. Most deliberate attacks are planned at battalion level or above, and
battalion attacks are usually deliberate. A company or platoon attack is
usually a quick attack but may be deliberate, eg, a raid on an enemy
locality or post. The platoon will normally only take part in a deliberate
attack as part of a large force.
Quick Attack
1205. A platoon or section quick attack may be launched:
a. against hastily prepared enemy defences;
b. when one or both sides are moving;
c. when contact is first made during an advance or during a pur-
suit;
d. on an unexpected encounter during a patrol operation;
e. to overcome unexpected opposition during a deliberate attack,
including fighting through the objective; and
f. to seize an opportunity presented by a rapid change in the en-
emy's ability or will to fight.
12–2
1206. In the quick attack there is little time for reconnaissance or
organisation of an elaborate fire plan but there is usually considerable
scope for manoeuvre, and fire and movement. The plan must be simple
and flexible and carried out with determination and speed. While
hesitation in seizing the initiative may be fatal, a quick attack, particularly
at platoon level, is not merely a contact drill. It should not be launched
without adequate reconnaissance and planning.
Deliberate Attack
1207. A deliberate attack is staged against well-organised, strong enemy
defences. Assaulting troops will often have little room in which to
manoeuvre but this is offset by additional time for reconnaissance and for
the preparation and coordination of the fire of tanks, artillery, air and
battalion weapons.
Key Considerations for the Attack
1208. When an attack is planned, the following factors must be
considered:
a. Surprise. An attack from an unexpected direction will usually
have a greater chance of success. The following aspects must be
OBSOLETE
considered to enhance the chance of achieving surprise:
(1) concealment of movement from the assembly area to the
LD;
(2) good security achieved by patrolling, radio silence and
march discipline;
(3) choice of time;
(4) speed; and
(5) deception.
b. Firepower. Fire superiority must be gained and maintained
throughout the assault to permit movement without prohibi-
tive losses. The fire plan must involve all indirect and direct fire
weapons available to the platoon.
c. Secure FUP and LD. There must be a secure FUP and LD oth-
erwise the assault may not start in accordance with the plan
and the coordination of the attack will be upset.
d. Maintenance and Momentum. The momentum of the attack
must be maintained so that the initiative is always retained.
This can be done by maintaining and utilising a reserve and by
speed and initiative at all levels. At company and platoon levels
a reserve is not usually possible, but the assault formation
should always be in depth.
12–3
e. Retention of the Initiative. Every opportunity consistent with

the aim must be taken to exploit tactical advantages. At platoon
level this is best achieved by speed and aggression.
f. Rapid Reorganisation. When captured, the objective must be
organised immediately for defence against counter-attack. An
attack is not complete until reorganisation is complete.
Stages of the Attack
1209. There are four stages in a platoon attack:
a. Stage 1 - Preparatory
b. Stage 2 - Assault
c. Stage 3 - Exploitation
d. Stage 4 - Reorganisation
SECTION 12-2. THE PREPARATORY STAGE

General
OBSOLETE
1210. The preparatory stage includes:
a. issue/receipt of company commander's orders,
b. issue of a warning order,
c. reconnaissance,
d. appreciation and planning,
e. orders,
f. rehearsal,
g. move to FUP, and
h. action in FUP.
Company Commander's Orders
1211. When a platoon is participating in an attack as part of a larger
force, the company commander will issue detailed orders to his platoon
commanders, and these are the basis for platoon orders.
Warning Order
1212. Having received his orders, or in the case of the encounter battle,
having reported the situation to his company commander as being within
his capability, the platoon commander warns the platoon so that
preparations for the attack can start.
12–4
1213. The warning order will contain:
a. the probable task,
b. earliest time to move or amount of notice, RV and time for OGp,
c. location of assembly area and FUP if known, and
d. any necessary administrative arrangements.
1214. Whenever possible the platoon commander will issue his warning
order verbally to section commanders. If time does not permit he may use
his runner, or his platoon sergeant. On receipt of the warning order,
section commanders warn their men to check weapons, ammunition,
equipment, water and rations, and prepare their sections to move.
Reconnaissance
1215. To arrive at a plan, the platoon commander must first determine:
a. the location, strength, probable task and likely reaction of the
enemy;
b. the platoon's objective;
c.
d. OBSOLETE
the best way to attack; and
when he can attack.
1216. To do this, he must carry out a reconnaissance and make an
appreciation. The time available for reconnaissance will depend on the
urgency of the operation. To ensure best results a reconnaissance should
always be planned. The platoon commander should refer to his map for
likely areas and routes for reconnaissance. Areas suitable for observing
approaches to the objective should be identified, with routes that are
defilade, or at least concealed from view.
1217. The platoon commander should conduct the reconnaissance
himself, although a section commander may be used if time is short or
there is more than one obvious approach. This is not ideal as the platoon
loses the ability to respond rapidly to the unexpected as soon as more than
one reconnaissance element is away. Reconnaissance parties must be
provided with adequate protection.
1218. In the case of a platoon attack against enemy in contact with the
leading section, the platoon commander moves forward to gain
information. Once the platoon commander has all the information he can
obtain, he makes a quick mental appreciation and formulates his plan.
12–5
1219. When participating in an attack by a larger force, the platoon
commander is normally told:
a. where the enemy is, in what strength and what he is doing;
b. what friendly troops are doing;
c. his objective;
d. the route he will take in the attack; and
e. H-hour.
1220. The objective and the route to it will always be examined to get a
more detailed estimate of the enemy, so that tasks can be allotted to
sections and so that the formations to be used on route to the objective can
be decided. Circumstances may prevent a detailed close reconnaissance
and may be restricted to a map (and air photograph) reconnaissance and
observation of the objectives from a distance.
1221. Before the attack, if time and the enemy permit, section
commanders should also view the objective and the route to it. In the worst
case it may only be possible to point out the objective during the early stage
of the attack.
OBSOLETE
Appreciation and Planning
1222. In making his plan, the platoon commander must consider the
following:
a. Enemy. He must determine the location of the enemy, his inten-
tions, his strength, dispositions, weapons and arcs of fire. This
can be determined by:
(1) sightings made by forward troops.
(2) further reconnaissance by the commander, and
(3) knowledge of enemy organisation and tactics.
b. Approaches. The platoon commander must now decide on the
best approach to the enemy position by comparing the good and
bad points of each approach. Factors to be considered are:
(1) Does the FUP require protection, and if so how can this be
provided? Can a distinctive LD be found adjacent to it,
probably the forward edge of the FUP? This should be at
right angles to the axis of attack.
(2) Are the route to the FUP and ground between the FUP
and the objectives covered from enemy fire? If they are
not, he must plan to cover the move forward with support-
ing fire from his own MGs or from mortars, artillery,
12–6
tanks, or battalion support weapons. Fire superiority
must be maintained throughout the attack.
(3) Is the approach concealed from enemy view? Thick timber
will provide concealment and will often allow assault
troops to get up to the enemy position without being de-
tected, but movement through thick timber makes con-
trol difficult.
(4) Does the approach offer positions from which supporting
fire can be directed against the enemy while the assault
troops move towards the objective? For MGs and rifles the
best angle for supporting fire is at right angles to the line of
approach. Can the troops providing supporting fire ob-
serve the assaulting elements from the support position?
Is the approach suitable for employment of fire and move-
ment?
(5) Are there any obstacles on the approach? Deep creeks,
wire and broken ground will slow down movement and
leave assaulting troops vulnerable to enemy fire.
(6) Is the approach secure? Can the enemy interfere with the
OBSOLETE
assault before it reaches the objective? Wide flanking
movements in close country may cause intrusion into
other enemy localities.
c. Timings. The platoon commander must decide on the earliest
possible H-hour. Considerations affecting H-hour are provided
in Chapter 9.
1223. Courses Open. From the above considerations, the platoon
commander may have two or more courses of action open to him. For a
quick attack it is unlikely that he will have more than two; for a deliberate
attack there may be more options for consideration. When he has
identified the options, the platoon commander must evaluate his options to
determine:
a. which course best achieves his aim, and
b. what the enemy can do to prevent him achieving his aim.
1224. Plan. As a result of the combat appreciation the platoon
commander now decides on his plan, which will include:
a. mission;
b. section tasks, including action on the objective;
c. employment of any support allotted;
12–7
d. the assembly are, which should be secure, concealed and free

from direct fire. In the quick attack, the assembly area will nor-
mally be the present location of the platoon;
e. the FUP, which should be secure from direct enemy action and
defilade from enemy direct fire and observation. It should be
sufficiently large for the deployment of the assault group and
the depth group, accessible by a covered approach and as close
to the objective as enemy observation and fire will allow;
f. order of march to the FUP, which will be determined by section
tasks such as securing of the FUP, assault and depth sections;
g. LD;
h. H-hour;
i. rate of advance, essential when supporting fire is used, but in
an attack with a larger force is specified in the company com-
mander's orders;
j. axis of assault;
k. coordination of fire support including when and how to start
OBSOLETE
and stop, and where it is to be directed;
l. limits of exploitation;
m. reorganisation locations;
n. location of platoon headquarters; and
o. administrative arrangements.
Orders
1225. In a deliberate attack, orders are given in detail, using models to
explain topography and the plan. Platoon and section commanders usually
view the ground from OP's or during a patrol.
1226. In the quick attack, time is limited. The platoon commander gives
orders to his section commanders and, preferably, gives them a quick look
at the ground. If a point section is in contact with the enemy, the section
commander should not be taken away from his section and brought to the
rear to receive his orders. The orders should be given or sent to the section
commander after the O group. Section commanders then pass these orders
to their sections, either in the assembly are or in the FUP.
1227. Examples of platoon and section orders for the attack are given in
MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.2, Infantry Commanders Aide-Memoire.
12–8
Preparing for the Attack
1228. In the deliberate attack, preparation takes place in the assembly
area and involves:
a. a final check of weapons, equipment and ammunition;
b. application of suitable camouflage;
c. feeding or issue of rations; and
d. rehearsals.
1229. In the quick attack the preparation will normally be restricted to a
final check of weapons, equipment and ammunition.
Movement to the FUP
1230. As late as possible, the assaulting troops move forward from the
assembly area to the FUP and form up in assault formation.
1231. Formations for the move from the assembly area to the FUP will
depend on:
a. the speed of movement required,
b.
c.
d.
OBSOLETE
control,
the likelihood of enemy interference, and
the going.
1232. Order of March. In a company attack, a platoon may be required
to move ahead of the remainder of the assault troops to secure the FUP.
This is normally the depth platoon in the assault. The depth platoon would
therefore move ahead of the assault platoons in the order of march. In a
platoon attack it may be necessary to move sections in the same way.
1233. Securing the FUP is usually difficult because of its size and the
commander of the security force should be given specific orders in this
regard. It may be possible to provide security by occupying dominating
ground which covers the FUP and approaches to it.
Action in the FUP
1234. The FUP is secured by the first section in the order of march. It
may be cleared by sweeping the area, or by placing groups in positions
which give observation of the FUP and protection against possible enemy
interference, or a combination of both. All-round defence is important and
positioning of the gun(s) is vital. Once the FUP is secured the assault
element will move in and adopt the assault formation. Depth elements will
then follow and take up position, in assault formation.
12–9
1235. Final briefings will occur, if necessary, as will checks on direction of
the assault, positioning of guns, and any other control measure as
required. As the FUP is close to the enemy, smoking, lights and noise are
prohibited. Time spent in the FUP must be kept to the absolute minimum.
Movement to the LD
1236. The LD is normally the forward edge of the FUP. If a separate LD
has been chosen, the assault troops move forward from the FUP deployed
in their attack formations. They do not halt on the LD.
SECTION 12-3 THE ASSAULT STAGE

Fire Support
1237. In order for the assaulting platoon to close with the enemy and
achieve a break-in sufficient firepower has to be concentrated to neutralise
the enemy's fire. The amount of firepower used will depend on the
effectiveness and extent of enemy fire, and the resources available, in
particular from outside the platoon. Increasingly effective enemy fire may
force the platoon commander to increase his covering fire by:
a. having a second section give covering fire to cover the initial
OBSOLETE
moves. Once a break-in is achieved the second section may join
the assaulting section;
b. grouping together section MGs and/or grenade launchers
which may be in a static fire support position or in the actual as-
sault, depending on the ground;
c. fire and movement between sections and within sections;
d. request tank, artillery or mortar fire to screen or neutralise the
enemy weapon or weapons and continue to attack; or
e. a coordinated use of any of the above.
1238. When a company attacks as part of a larger force, the covering fire
will either be provided from outside the company, or a platoon, or elements
thereof may be tasked with providing fire support for the assaulting
elements.
1239. The considerations for providing fire support are described in
Section 12-6.
12–10
Assault Formations
1240. The size of the assaulting element will depend on the volume of fire
required to neutralise the enemy fire. If one section is sufficient to
neutralise the enemy fire, the other two will form the assault group.
Ground will also be a determining factor.
1241. The platoon will begin its attack in a predetermined formation. The
basic formations are:
a. one section up, or
b. two sections up.
1242. One Section Up. One section up, with one section in depth and
one section providing covering fire from a flank, as illustrated in Figure
12-1, is the most common formation. This formation provides the flexibility
and the depth necessary to deal with unexpected opposition and to
consolidate the objective.
OBSOLETE
12–11
Objective
Assault Section
OBSOLETE
Platoon Headquarters
Fire Support Section

Depth Section
Figure 12-1. Platoon Attack - One Section Up
1243. Two Sections Up. Two sections up with one section providing
covering fire from a flank, (Figure 12-2) is also a common formation. It is
used when the objective is either too wide for one section, or in close
country or at night, when the spacing between troops must be reduced to a
few metres, preventing the coverage of the objective with one section.
When two sections are up, the section providing fire support should be
close enough to the objective to be able to provide depth to the assault once
the fire support task has been completed.
12–12
Objective
Assault
Sections
OBSOLETE
Platoon Headquarters Fire Support
Section
Figure 12-2. Platoon Attack - Two Sections U
1244. Within the basic formations, sections will adopt formations suited
to the ground and cover available. The extended line formation (paragraph
609) is the most common as it provides maximum firepower to the front. In
close country, or at night, sections may have to move up in file and deploy
into extended line when close to the objective. In this case the rapid change
from single file(s) to an assault formation should be rehearsed as a platoon
drill.
12–13
1245. The distance between men will vary according to the terrain and
the visibility. Normally sections will be in extended line with 5 to 10 m
between men. In close country and at night control is more difficult and
tighter formations are necessary. Men who must be visible to their
neighbours may be as close as 2 m.
1246. The platoon commander, with his radio operator and runner,
should move a short distance behind the centre of the assaulting section or
sections. Considerations for the movement of the platoon commander are
described in Section 4-1.
1247. The platoon sergeant may move either with platoon headquarters,
or behind one of the assaulting sections if there is a dangerous flank, or he
may remain with the fire support section, whichever the platoon
commander decides. The platoon sergeant must, however, be in a position
to take over command if the platoon commander becomes a casualty. The
possibility of the platoon commander and platoon sergeant becoming
casualties together should be considered when deciding whether the
platoon sergeant should move with platoon headquarters.
Movement to the Objective
OBSOLETE
1248. At H-hour, the assault troops cross the LD.
1249. When the rate of advance is predetermined, covering artillery and
mortar fire are planned on this rate. As troops must move as close as
possible to any covering fire provided, platoon and section commanders
must ensure their troops advance at the planned rate.
1250. During this stage control is essential. Troops must maintain their
formation and not bunch. When visibility permits, section commanders
must constantly watch all members of the section, and they in turn must
watch their commanders. The noise of battle often drowns out voices, field
signals and whistle blasts may need to be used.
1251. In the assault the wounded are left for attention by others in depth
to the assault. In a company attack stretcher bearers usually follow
assaulting platoons. In a platoon quick attack the wounded will be cared
for after the attack succeeds.
1252. Troops must not stop during the assault because of enemy artillery,
mortar fire or minefields. To do so will cause more casualties.
1253. The crossing of obstacles in a deliberate attack will have been
planned. Objectives chosen for a quick attack will not have elaborate
obstacles. Section and platoon commanders must retain control whilst
crossing obstacles. The methods of negotiating obstacles are considered in
Chapter 10.
12–14
1254. Keeping direction during an attack in close country or at night is
difficult. It is usually maintained by the section and platoon commanders
using compasses, or by observing covering fire falling on the objective.
The Break-in
1255. The fire plan will have artillery and mortars in support of an attack
continuing to neutralise the objective until the last possible moment.
When this indirect fire lifts, the enemy should be stunned and ineffective
for a few moments. Full advantage must be taken of this period by any or
all of the following:
a. Tanks and APCs. Tanks used in the attack, or as fire support,
continue to give close support.
b. Fire Support. Small-arms fire from supporting sections or pla-
toons is continued for as long as possible.
c. Assaulting Troops. Assaulting troops must try to fire from the
shoulder as they advance. Troops must observe fire discipline,
as in many cases fire control orders will not be possible. They
must not arrive at the objective without ammunition.
OBSOLETE
d. Leading Sections. Where the ground and vegetation offer no ob-
stacle to movement, leading sections should move very quickly
over the last 30 or 40 m to the enemy positions to minimise the
effect of grenades.
Fighting Through the Objective
1256. The assault must not stop until the objective has been cleared.
Leading assault sections may have to bypass small enemy posts leaving
them to be cleared by rear sections. If the rear sections also have to bypass
this opposition, the platoon commander must inform his company
commander. The latter circumstances will be unusual.
1257. Fighting through the objective to the limit of exploitation calls for a
high standard of leadership, initiative and determination. Teamwork and
training will be tested to the utmost. Example, leadership and individual
initiative will be essential to success in the fight through.
1258. Opposition must be quickly and accurately located and fire and
movement within the section and the platoon used to keep the attack
moving and retain the initiative. The scope for manoeuvre is very limited
and any fire and movement usually consists of alternate groups going to
ground and supporting the forward movement of the others for a few
metres at a time, or small groups working forward to deal with each
individual post or trench. Care must be taken that groups do not get too far
12–15
in front and risk receiving fire from own troops. The more groups there are
operating, the more difficult it is for the platoon commander and the
section commanders to retain control, so every opportunity must be made
to take advantage of ground, cover and slackening of enemy fire to get
forward. Inflexible adherence to small or large fire and movement groups,
irrespective of conditions, may result in the attack coming to a halt or even
failing.
1259. If leading sections run short of ammunition, or are held up by
enemy fire, the platoon commander must be quick and bold in using rear
sections to maintain the momentum.
1260. Tanks accompanying the infantry are of great value in dealing with
enemy MGs and bunkers.
1261. HE grenades may be used to advantage, but their use must be
strictly controlled, particularly against targets above ground, as casualties
may be caused to own troops. Smoke grenades will often be useful in
covering the movement of troops.
1262. Depth sections or platoons move around behind the assault troops
and usually consolidate, their tasks being:
OBSOLETE
a. clearing of bunkers, tunnels and trenches bypassed by the as-
sault sections and platoons;
b. holding and searching prisoners;
c. protecting the leading sections and platoons from enemy in the
rear who are pretending to be dead; and
d. tending to the wounded.
1263. Fighting through the objective continues until the limit of
exploitation (paragraph 1265) is reached. Whilst every opportunity should
be taken to pursue fleeing enemy, the limit of exploitation is a control
measure and movement beyond must be coordinated with other units or
sub-units involved in the operation.
12–16
SECTION 12-4. THE EXPLOITATION STAGE
General
1264. Exploitation is conducted to take advantage of success in battle, to
follow up initial gains, and to improve the immediate security of a newly
taken objective. It enables the attacker to retain the initiative by
preventing the enemy from reorganising his defences, mounting a
counter-attack or conducting an orderly withdrawal.
1265. At platoon level, exploitation is usually limited because of the size
of the force. The platoon commander will usually indicate a limit of
exploitation beyond the objective. It is a control measure so that section
commanders do no push too far beyond the objective. This does not
preclude the platoon from conducting a quick follow-up of the enemy, but
the platoon commander should quickly reorganise first to regain control,
check casualties and brief his troops.
1266. When acting as part of a larger force the platoon may be designated
as the exploitation force, in which case it is likely to conduct an advance in
contact or a pursuit.
SECTION 12-5. REORGANISATION

General
OBSOLETE
1267. When the objective is cleared of the enemy, the assaulting platoons
and sections must reorganise quickly, to prevent a successful counter
attack by the enemy. Reorganisation is the process by which control of the
platoon is regained and the platoon is firmly established in its new
locality.
1268. When fighting through the objective is finished, and the limit of
exploitation has been reached, platoons and sections move to their
reorganisation areas as laid down in orders. Section commanders account
for their section members, post sentries, site their MG and fire trenches
and troops begin digging in. Section commanders or their 2ICs collect and
report to their platoon sergeant the following information:
a. ammunition held;
b. casualties; and
c. enemy prisoners of war, stating whether wounded, and the
number of dead on the position.
1269. In a platoon attack, a section which has been providing covering
fire from a flank will usually move forward to the reorganisation position
with the remainder of the platoon.
12–17
1270. The selection of the reorganisation position must be considered in
terms of the likely enemy action and the ground. The platoon commander
must decide whether he will reorganise on or off the objective. If enemy
mortar and artillery bombardment prevents digging, the platoon
commander may consider using the enemy trenches, or he may try to get
clear of the bombardment by moving off the objective. Captured enemy
trenches should only be used by our troops when there is no other suitable
cover available. Captured trenches are unlikely to be well sited for our
purposes (they will probably be facing the wrong way) and their exact
positions will be know to the enemy's artillery, mortars and counter-attack
force. By moving off the objective, the platoon will be able to disperse and
site trenches to cover likely enemy counter-attack approaches, but it will
take the platoon longer to carry out its post-attack administration as
casualties, prisoners and equipment will need to be moved from the
objective to the reorganisation position.
1271. The sequence of action by the platoon commander will be to:
a. make certain that he has correctly identified his objective and
its limits;
b. coordinate a hasty defence with his section commanders. This
OBSOLETE
includes indirect fire support DF tasks if available. His immedi-
ate aim is to hold his objective firmly;
c. report capture of the objective to his company commander, nor-
mally by success signal or radio;
d. clear any ground which may conceal enemy who would
threaten the position;
e. make a thorough reconnaissance of the position to ensure that
his reorganisation deployment is the best possible for defence;
and
f. send out patrols.
1272. The platoon sergeant will:
a. arrange guards for prisoners;
b. arrange for the evacuation of casualties to company headquar-
ters;
c. supervise the digging of platoon headquarters;
d. consolidate ammunition expenditure and arrange redistribu-
tion of remaining ammunition between sections;
e. report ammunition expenditure, casualties and prisoners to
company headquarters;
12–18
f. find out exactly how the platoon commander has sited the pla-
toon, what patrols are out and what orders have been given, in
case he should have to take over;
g. organise the distribution of ammunition and reorganisation of
stores delivered to the platoon area;
h. arrange for evacuation of prisoners and disposal of captured
equipment; and
i. arrange for burial of the enemy dead.
Examples
1273. Illustrations of various platoon attacks are shown in Figure 12-3.
SECTION 12-6. THE RIFLE PLATOON IN THE COMPANY

ATTACK
General
1274. At company or higher level, a platoon will usually be tasked as
either:
OBSOLETE
a. assault group,
b. depth platoon, or
c. fire support.
Assault Group
1275. The actions of the assault group in a company attack are the same
as those of a platoon conducting an attack alone. In a company attack the
company commander will give coordinating details such as:
a. the platoon objective,
b. the platoon formation,
c. the rate of assault,
d. the axis of assault,
e. action on objective,
f. the reorganisation position, and
g. the limit of exploitation.
12–19
Fire Support
Group
Fire Support
3
1 L D
Group
L D
Line of Departure Assault
(Crest of Hill) Section
FUP 1 2
2 3 FUP
(Rear of Hill)
2
3
3 Assembly Area Assembly Area
(a) Note: 1 Section may join assault to

assist 3 Section once fight
through starts
(b)
OBSOLETE
Fire Support L D
Group
Assault Sections
1 2
Depth Section
3
Note: 1 Fire Support Group may be comprised

(c)
of grenaders, MGS, riflemen.
Figure 12-3. Examples of a Platoon Attack

12–20
Depth Platoon
1276. Normally one platoon is held to provide depth during each phase of
an attack. The company commander commits the depth platoon when it is
needed to influence the action and to maintain the momentum of the
attack. Because of the various tasks which may be given to the depth
platoon, the platoon commander must know the missions and tactical
plans of the assault platoons. He must also know as much as possible
about the ground and the enemy situation in the entire company area of
operation, and keep abreast of the tactical situation as it develops. Finally
he must be capable of rapid and effective response when committee.
1277. Tasks of the Depth Platoon. The depth platoon may be required
to:
a. secure the company FUP and LD,
b. protect the flanks or rear of the company,
c. maintain contact with adjacent units,
d. clear a position which has been overrun or bypassed by the as-
sault platoons,
e.
f.
OBSOLETE
take over the mission of an assault platoon which requires relief
or rest,
attack from a new direction, or
g. protect or assist the reorganisation on the objective.
Fire Support
1278. The assaulting platoons in a company attack must be covered by
direct supporting fire from the moment indirect fire support lifts until the
platoon reaches the objective. This supporting fire may be provided by
tanks, APCs, battalion direct fire weapons, or by another rifle platoon or
element thereof.
1279. When a platoon is tasked with providing fire support, the location
of the fire support position will be specified by the company commander as
will the details of the fire support requirement. The platoon must move to
the fire support location, which may not be secure, and position itself to
provide the support required.
1280. The precautions taken by the platoon commander during the move
to, and the occupation of, the fire support position will depend on the
location of the position and the time available to get into position. The
platoon commander must assume, unless it is known otherwise, that the
12–21
fire support position is not secure and he must approach with caution. He
must also expect that the position will be registered as an enemy DF and
therefore he must dig fire trenches, if time allows, and ensure that the men
are as dispersed as possible. While there is a need for maximum firepower
to be directed at the objective, the need for all-round protection will still
exist.
1281. The fire support platoon or element must ensure that they can
provide maximum fire onto the whole objective. Individual fire discipline
must be maintained so that ammunition is not wasted. The fire of the
platoon can be controlled by the company commander or the assault
platoons by radio, or by the fire support commander who must be in a
position to observe the effects of fire on the objective. Once the pre-H-hour
and H-hour tasks are completed, part or all of the fire support element may
be moved to conform with the reorganisation plan or to assist in the fight
through the enemy position.
SECTION 12-7. SUPPORT FOR THE ATTACK
General
1282. During the attack, every effort must be made to use all available
OBSOLETE
forms of support. It is likely that at platoon level the following support only
will be available:
a. battalion and company direct fire support,
b. artillery and mortars, and
c. AFV fire.
1283. This should not preclude the platoon commander from considering
and using other forms of support if available, such as:
a. CAIRS to provide neutralising fire onto the enemy,
b. engineers to assist with obstacle breaching and assault demoli-
tions,
c. armed helicopters to provide intimate support, and
d. support from other platoons to provide fire support or act as
cut-offs.
1284. A knowledge of weapon characteristics and safety aspects is
essential to the platoon commander when employing any of these
resources. Additional information required by the platoon commander is
contained in MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.2, Infantry Commanders Aide-Memoire.
12–22
1285. Combat support is considered in detail in Chapter 2 of this
pamphlet. Support company in the attack and supporting arms in the
attack are described in detail in MLW 2, Inf Trg, 1.1, The Infantry
Battaliion.
SECTION 12-8. NIGHT ATTACK

General
1286. A deliberate night attack will rarely be conducted by the platoon
alone. The platoon will usually participate as part of a company or
battalion deliberate attack.
1287. A night attack is made in preference to a daylight attack to:
a. take advantage of a tactical situation,
b. maintain the momentum of an advance,
c. achieve a greater degree of surprise,
d. minimise the effect of enemy direct and indirect fire, and
e. reduce the possibility of an armoured counter-attack before re-
OBSOLETE
organisation is complete.
1288. The stages and conduct of a night attack by a platoon are the same
as those for a daylight operation, however, three aspects require particular
attention, namely:
a. simplicity of plan to facilitate control which is difficult at night;
b. thorough reconnaissance, both by day and night if possible; and
c. detailed preparations.
1289. As in daylight operations, a night attack can be noisy or silent,
however at company and platoon level a silent attack may be relatively
easier to mount.
Movement to the FUP and Forming Up
1290. In a silent attack particular attention must be paid to equipment to
reduce noise and to reduce weight for ease of movement. It is likely that
enemy surveillance equipment will be used to detect the move and routes.
Countermeasures must be carefully selected to prevent detection.
1291. In a company attack the LD, the FUP and routes to it are marked
by tapes or lights. Guides are provided to guide platoons to their exact
forming up positions. In a platoon attack, section guides (who have been
rehearsed, if possible, both by day and night) will lead sections from the
12–23
assembly area to their exact positions in the FUP. These should be simply
marked for night identification. The night vision of the platoon should not
be impaired by the use of lights before the attack.
Movements to the Objective
1292. Aids to keeping direction are compass bearings, pace checkers, use
of tracer ammunition, falling covering fire, use of prominent landmarks,
skyline features and the moon. Men may wear white or luminous objects
on their backs or helmets.
1293. Changes in direction after crossing the LD should be avoided.
Sections must maintain contact with their flanking sections.
1294. Rates of advance will depend on the degree of darkness, the need
for silence, the fire plan, obstacles, vegetation and the state of the ground.
It will probably be about half the daylight rate. Men must move at a steady
pace and must be briefed on the action to be taken if the enemy uses flares
or other means of illumination.
1295. Even when surprise has been lost, it is still best to exercise control
with a minimum of shouting, as by listening the assault troops can gain
valuable information on the enemy's whereabouts, and a silent approach
OBSOLETE
can be unnerving to the enemy. One advantage of the night attack is the
psychological effect upon the enemy whose doubts and fears are magnified
by the unknown.
1296. The move to the objective requires the attacking troops to reach the
final assault position without being discovered. If the attack is discovered
before this stage, the following will normally occur:
a. The commander will call for prearranged supporting fire on the
objective to neutralise enemy fire. Planned illumination may be
called for to permit better control and more rapid movement.
b. Platoons should attempt to continue in their previous forma-
tions. If this is impossible, they must move forward using fire
and movement. If they are close to the objective, the final as-
sault stages, including break-in, can begin as soon as the attack
is discovered.
1297. Scattered fire by small elements of enemy must not be taken as loss
of surprise and should not be taken as the signal to begin the assault.
Fighting Through the Objective
1298. This is the most difficult stage of a night attack. It requires detailed
training and rehearsal and must be done systematically to avoid confusion
and to retain control. The plan should avoid the necessity of passing one
section through another. Particular points to be avoided are:
12–24
a. converging on enemy weapon flashes;

b. use of grenades above ground level; and
c. loss of control, permitting groups of assaulting troops to move
ahead, thereby greatly increasing the risks of causing casual-
ties to own troops.
Reorganisation
1299. The plan for reorganisation on the objective is included in the
orders for the attack and will be similar to the procedure used in daylight.
Coordinated defence may initially be difficult. In the darkness there is a
tendency for sections to lay out their positions too close together. This is
avoided by very clear instructions for reorganisation, careful liaison by
section commanders, and thorough and early coordination by the platoon
commander.
12100. A system similar to the ‘12 o'clock' method used in harbouring may
be employed. In this case ‘12 o'clock' should be the axis of the attack, using
either a compass bearing, track, or other definable feature.
12101. Commanders must know pre-arranged DF tasks and who can call
for them. All members of the platoon must know the pre-arranged success
OBSOLETE
signal.
12102. Any support weapons and their detachments which join the
platoon during darkness must be protected.
SECTION 12-9. ATTACKING TRENCH SYSTEMS AND

STRONG POINTS
General
12103. Pillboxes, fortified dug-outs and bunkers, will often be met in an
attack on a prepared position. They will usually be sited to be mutually
supporting. They will normally be protected by wire and mines. The rifle
platoon will have to deal with such places, thought usually with support
from battalion support weapons and possibly tanks. On occasions less
formidable types of bunkers will have to be captured by the platoon with
its own weapons, using smoke and HE grenades, platoon SRAAWs and the
SRAAWSs of the company support section.
12104. Against a mutually supporting series of fortifications, a
simultaneous attack on all the fortifications will give the best chance of
success. The fire from these fortifications will become confused and the
enemy will not be able to move reinforcements easily to stop a gap. The
rifle platoon cannot attack more than one emplacement at a time.
12–25
Open Trenches
12105. Each trench may be assaulted by a complete rifle group covered by
the complete gun group. Airburst artillery or mortar fire should first be
used to destroy or neutralise the enemy in the trenches prior to the assault.
Trench Systems
12106. Once the assault section has broken into a continuous zigzag
trench system occupied by the enemy, it will divide into previously detailed
groups to clear the trenches. A grenade group and a clearing group will be
required. The grenade group throws grenades into the section of the trench
to be cleared. As soon as the grenades explode the clearing group charges
in to complete clearing that section. This process is continued until the
whole system has been cleared. Strict control by the section commander is
essential.
Small Bunkers
12107. There are various methods for dealing with bunkers that are not
heavily fortified. In general, grenades, anti-armoured weapons or
prepared explosive charges will provide the most effective means of attack;
OBSOLETE
men armed only with rifles will be of little use. Some methods for dealing
with bunkers are as follows:
a. A party of two to four men with HE and smoke grenades ma-
noeuvre forward under cover of the fire of the section gun group
or their own smoke. When they reach a blind spot of the bunker,
they push grenades or prepared explosive charges through the
apertures.
b. The platoon SRAAW closes within range of the bunker under
cover of smoke. One hit should destroy the bunker.
c. When an SRAAW is used to clear a bunker the hit must be
quickly followed by the assault party using grenades to kill any
survivors.
12108. All bunkers must be treated as if they contain live enemy, even if
no activity has been detected from them. The clearing of bunkers must be
systematic or the enemy will come up behind assault groups.
Deliberate Attack
12109. A deliberate attack can be undertaken by one platoon against one
pillbox/bunker. A possible organisation of the attacking team is:
12–26
a. No 1 Section and platoon headquarters, fire support section;
b. No 2 Section, with SRAAW from the company support section,
cut off section;
c. No 3 Section, pillbox clearing section; and
d. assault pioneers added to No 2 Section to operate Bangalore
Torpedoes and any charges used.
12110. A possible method of attack is as follows:
a. The fire support section opens heavy fire on the enemy. Smoke
is laid by firing smoke grenades from the rifle.
b. No 2 Section and the assault pioneers move to a position close to
the wire. The SRAAW team should move further to a flank
ready to open fire on the pillbox. The assault pioneers place the
Bangalore Torpedoes in the wire, light the fuses and withdraw.
c. When the wire is blown No 2 Section rushes through the gap
and takes up a position beyond the pillbox, killing any enemy in
OBSOLETE
trenches outside it. The assault pioneers follow, place charges
against the pillbox and join No 2 Section. Any anti-personnel
mines in the gap should have been destroyed by the bangalores.
d. When the charges go off, No 3 Section clears the pillbox with
grenades.
12111. The use of flame against strong points can also be very effective. It
has a great morale effect and the threat of its use may even induce the
enemy to leave a pillbox or emplacement before any attack is launched.
12112. A platoon attack against a pillbox is illustrated in Figure 12-4.
12–27
CUT OFF
No 2 SECTION POSITION
PILL
BOX
XX
X XX
XX XXX SMOKE
X XX X
XX X X X
XX X XXXXXXXXXXX XX XXX
XX X
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
OBSOLETE No 2 SECTION
AND SRAAW.
(BLOWS GAP IN WIRE)
No 1 SECTION
(FIRE SUPPORT SECTION)
No 3 SECTION*
(WAITING TO CLEAR
PILL BOX)
PLATOON * MAY HAVE FLAME THROWER

HEADQUARTERS
Figure 12-4. Platoon attacking a Pillbox

12–28
OBSOLETE
13–1
CHAPTER 13
DEFENCE
SECTION 13-1 GENERAL
Introduction
1301. The platoon will usually occupy a defensive position as part of a
company or a larger force. The platoon will be required to hold its locality
firmly and to destroy an enemy assault by fire, even if other defended
localities are overrun, or the platoon is surrounded.
1302. When a force is in contact with the enemy, defence must be
conducted aggressively. The platoon will be called upon to play a full part
in a patrol programme designed to seek out, harass and kill the enemy.
1303. The circumstances in which the platoon will undertake defence are:
a. in an advance to contact, so that any enemy assault can be de-
stroyed;
b. to destroy an advancing enemy on ground of our own choice;
c.
d.
OBSOLETE
to form a firm base for patrolling activities or for a company at-
tack;
to secure ground that has been seized against the coun-
ter-attack;
e. to secure the company withdrawal route.
1304. Typical platoon tasks in defence are;
a. defence of the position;
b. patrolling, both fighting and reconnaissance;
c. standing patrols and listening posts (LPs)
d. screen and OP tasks;
e. development of the defensive position, including obstacles,
wire, pits, crawl trenches, digging in communications wire and
latrines;
f. administrative tasks such as water parties, resupply, stores,
dumping and local daily routines; and
g. rehearsals for counter-attack, ambushing and patrols.
AL1
13–2
1305. The type of defensive position that can be constructed depends on
the time and materials available. The platoon defence may be undertaken
deliberately when there is no contact with the enemy or it may be adopted
hastily when there is close contact.
1306. In deliberate defence there will be time for detailed reconnaissance,
planning and coordination on ground of our own choice. In hasty defence
the locality will have to be developed on ground provided by the
circumstances of the battle, strengthened by such local readjustment as is
possible. This may be limited to improvement of natural cover. In both
deliberate and hasty defence the basic considerations and actions are the
same.
1307. In preparing his plan for the defence the platoon commander, in
addition to orders and information received from his company commander,
must keep the following considerations in mind:
a. use of ground,
b. mutual support,
OBSOLETE
c. all-round defence,
d. control,
e. depth,
f. centralisation of firepower, and
g. security.
1308. These basic considerations will often be in conflict to some degree
and must be applied with common sense to each particular piece of ground
to obtain the best solution.
Use of Ground
1309. Fields of Fire. Fire trenches should be sited on ground which
affords good fields of fire. Depending on the country, the length of the fields
of fire will vary from a few metres in very close country to 300 m or more in
open country. Care must be taken in thinning undergrowth to achieve
clear fields of fire. The need to clear fire lanes must be balanced against the
requirement for concealment.
1310. Observation. Platoon and section commanders should be able to
observe the enemy at longer ranges than the field of fire. This gives them
more time to prepare to meet any attack which develops and to call for
mortar and artillery support. A good field of observation also improves
13–3
security and makes it possible to reduce the number of sentries by day. A
good field of observation or fire can also be used by the enemy and the
desire to see and fire over long distances must be balanced against the
need for concealment. Within the locality occupants of a pit should be able
to observe all around their pit to a distance of 30-40 m, ie, grenade
throwing range.
1311. Concealment. The position must remain concealed from enemy
ground and air observation and surveillance. Positions not concealed risk
destruction or neutralisation. The closer the country, the easier it is to
achieve concealment. In open country, when the platoon is part of a
battalion area defence, it may be possible to occupy positions on reverse or
counter slopes and thus make enemy ground observation difficult. Reverse
slopes are described in detail in of MLW Two, Inf Trg 1.1, The Infantry
Battalion. Concealment from air observation is described in Section 8-4 of
this pamphlet.
1312. Dispersion. The platoon must not be too concentrated otherwise it
will present a vulnerable target to bombardment, either by artillery or
from the air. On the other hand, it must not be so dispersed as to allow
infiltration by night or present problems of control. As a guideline, the
OBSOLETE
centre of one section should rarely be less than 50 metres from the centre of
the next section or from platoon headquarters, except in very close country.
1313. Maximum Use of Obstacles. The platoon defensive position
must be planned so that maximum use is made of natural obstacles.
Natural obstacles can be made more effective by the addition of artificial
obstacles. In the absence of suitable natural obstacles, artificial obstacles
must be developed. Obstacles must be covered by observed fire and the
enemy must be prevented from reconnoitering or interfering with them.
Mutual Support
1314. There must be mutual support between sections so that a section
position cannot be attacked without at least one other section being able to
bring effective fire onto the attackers.
All Round Defence
1315. The platoon must be capable of all-round defence. The extent of all
round defence necessary will depend on the terrain and the proximity of
other platoons. For instance:
a. Aplatoon whose rear and part of its flanks are protected by oth-
ers is able to concentrate its fire on the most likely approaches.
It must still be able to deal with infiltrating enemy parties and
hold its position against enemy who have broken through the
13–4
nearby localities and are attacking it from the flanks or rear.
The selection of alternative arcs of fire, and possibly alternative
positions covering the same platoon sector, especially for fire
trenches in depth or on the flanks, must be considered. Second-
ary positions may be necessary to cover other approaches.
b. An isolated platoon locality will need the maximum all-round
defence possible, especially in close country. This reduces the
concentration of fire on the most likely approaches, but implies
that weapons, including MGs, have interlocking arcs, ie, the fire
of any weapon is designed to interlock with and overlap the fire
of another weapon. Weapons with longer ranges should inter-
lock further out so that as the attacker presses further forward
he encounters more interlocking arcs of fire.
Control
1316. The platoon commander must be able to control his sections from
platoon headquarters. It is desirable for section posts to be in view and it is
essential that at least one fire trench of each section (preferably the section
commander's) is within voice range. The shape and nature of the ground
OBSOLETE
will sometimes make it impossible to see all section posts and battle noise
will often prevent voice control. These circumstances are overcome by:
a. relaying orders, from the platoon commander through one sec-
tion to another;
b. by personal visit or runner (difficult but not impossible, even
when under attack) using crawl trenches where possible;
c. pre-arranged signals, such as whistle blasts; and
d. by use of field telephone if available, or modified systems using
line, dug in when time permits.
Depth
1317. There must be depth within the platoon, so that regardless of the
direction of attack, the enemy, having passed through one section Is
confronted with another. Depth sections can be sited to fire between or
over the heads of forward sections. Depth implies depth of fire as well as
physical depth on the ground. The platoon commander achieves depth by:
a. patrols;
b. use of obstacles which will slow the enemy down so that he may
be destroyed further out;
13–5
c. depth pits within a section and depth sections within the pla-
toon; and
d. use of all available weapon systems including small arms,
SRAAWs MRAAWs grenades (both hand and weapon pro-
jected) Anti-personnel weapon M18A1 (Claymore), artillery
and mortars.
Centralisation of Firepower
1318. The platoon commander must ensure that maximum fire is
brought to bear on the most likely enemy approaches. This will require
coordination between sections, flanking companies, support company
detachments and supporting arms elements. The company commander is
responsible for coordination between his platoons, flanking companies,
and support company and supporting arms sub-unit commanders. The
platoon commander must coordinate the sections of his platoon. The
platoon commander must also be aware of the firepower that will be
provided from flanking companies, support company and supporting arms
elements. This includes the location of DF tasks for artillery, mortars,
anti-armoured weapons and the primary tasks of MGs of the SFMG
OBSOLETE
Platoon and other companies.
Security
1319. The platoon commander must ensure that he is not surprised. He
will do this by participating in the battalion patrolling programme and by
the use of sentries and surveillance devices. The use of sentries is described
in detail in Section 8-3.
SECTION 13-2. THE DEFENSIVE LAYOUT

General
1320. The layout of a platoon's pits may consist of the three sections' pits
and platoon headquarters' pits being evenly spaced throughout the
locality, or by having three section posts and a platoon headquarters. The
section posts consist of a close grouping of the section pits, but they must
still cover the section area by observation and fire. The closeness of the pits
in a section post makes verbal control by the section commander easier,
and he can move from pit to pit in a minimum of time and with minimum
exposure. A combination of the two types of layout may be desirable,
depending on the ground. A typical platoon defensive layout is illustrated
in Figure 13-1.
AL1
13–6
1 Section 1 Section
Section Post
Platoon HQ Section Comd

Platoon HQ
3 Section
2 Section
3 Section 2 Section
Figure 13-1. Typical Independent Platoon Defensive Layout
Types of Positions
OBSOLETE
1321. The platoon commander must use every ruse he can think of to
deceive the enemy. His defence must be sited to cover all enemy
approaches by day and night. He may move all or part of his platoon, or
only individual MG pits. In order to do this, it may be necessary to prepare
several defence positions as follows:
a. Primary Position. The position from which a platoon or weapon
carries out its primary task.
b. Alternative Position. The position from which the primary task
can be carried out if the primary position becomes untenable.
Alternative positions are prepared to:
(1) deny the enemy knowledge of MG positions, by moving
them to alternative positions by day and night,
(2) enable depth guns to move to prepared positions to assist
in countering penetration, and
(3) cover the same approach from a different location.
13–7
c. Secondary Position. A previously reconnoitred (and if possible,

prepared) position to which a platoon or MG may move to in or-
der to cover another approach.
Platoon Headquarters
1322. Platoon headquarters should be sited where the platoon
commander can see and control his sections and is accessible, preferably by
day as well as night, to essential visitors such as the company commander,
medical officer and runners. It must be positioned to ensure good
communications both to company HQ and to supporting arms and units.
Alternatives must be available.
1323. The layout and construction of platoon headquarters is the
responsibility of the platoon sergeant once its position on the ground has
been decided. Two fire trenches with overhead protection will be
constructed from which, if possible, all section posts and the platoon front
can be seen. The radio set on the company net should not be screened from
company headquarters.
Fire Trenches
OBSOLETE
1324. Work must commence immediately on fire trenches. MLW Two,
Engr Trg 2.2, Obstacles and Field Defences describes the requirements of
fire trenches. Selected information is also contained in MLW Two, Inf Trg
1.4, The Infantry Soldiers Handbook and MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.2, Infantry
Commanders Aide-Memoire.
1325. Before digging starts, the platoon should ‘stand to'. This gives the
platoon commander an opportunity to check the distances between
sections. Minutes spent at this stage could avoid hours needed to resite
trenches once digging has begun.
Camouflage
1326. The top layer of the soil should be carefully removed and preserved
for later use. Soil which is not required for the parapet or for overhead
protection should be placed in containers as it is dug. Sandbags, shelters,
blanket outers and bulk ration tins are suitable for this purpose. The soil
should be progressively hidden in depressions or behind logs or the
buttresses of trees, within or just outside the post. Care must be taken to
ensure this spoil is covered from aerial observation. A blanket of vines,
leaves or transplanted bushes may be used to screen bare scars. Track
plans are to be rigidly adhered to.
13–8
Latrines
1327. Latrines should be sited and dug as soon as possible after work
begins. The requirement for siting and digging latrines is detailed in
Sections 5-8.
Fire Lanes
1328. Fire lanes must be prepared with minimum interference to the
existing growth. Where vegetation has to be disturbed it should be done in
an irregular manner, but only to sufficient height to allow a firer to sight
his weapon at ground level. Often sufficient vision can be obtained by
thinning out leaves and undergrowth.
1329. Troops only need to view the enemy's legs when using fire lanes;
they can judge where the rest of the enemy's body is and engage it through
growth sufficient to stop view but not bullets.
1330. Fire trenches can be further camouflaged by transplanting shrubs
from elsewhere into sandbags, ration containers and ammunition boxes
and siting them in the lane, close in front of the fire trenches. These shrubs
can be knocked down when the enemy assaults.
OBSOLETE
Arcs and Tasks of the Section MG
1331. Arcs and tasks within arcs are defined as follows:
a. Arcs. The arc of the gun is the limit restricted by physical ob-
structions or the presence of own troops, within which it can
fire. The limit is defined by the left and right of arc.
b. Tasks. Within each MG's arc a number of tasks may be given
and a priority allocated to each. About four tasks will be the
maximum.
1332. Priority of Tasks. The primary task of the MG is determined by
the platoon or company commander to ensure that in the wort possible
case, eg, a simultaneous attack on the entire battalion/company frontage
in reduced visibility, the fire of all MGs is coordinated.
1333. Unless there are reasons for not firing an MG, eg concealment its
position or conservation of ammunition, the gunner should be free to
engage opportunity targets anywhere within his arc of fire as long as he is
not engaged on higher priority tasks.
13–9
Staking the Arc

1334. The limits of the arc of fire should be marked at the fire trench with
four stout pegs. The primary and secondary tasks within the arc are not
staked, but a method similar to that shown at Plate 13-1 should be used.
The staking of the arc ensures that other members of the section are not
endangered during night firing.
1335. In rear fire trenches it will be necessary to ensure that weapons
sited to give overhead fire over forward trenches are not depressed too low.
This can be achieved by a combination of stakes and wire.
OBSOLETE
Plate 13-1. Staking the Primary Arc

13–10
Use of Fixed Lines

1336. During periods of limited visibility MGs should be laid on fixed
lines. Sighting pegs are used to enable the MG to fire on its task during
darkness, fog or smoke (Plate 13-2). If the arc covered by the MG includes
dead ground the section commander must ensure that this can be covered
by fire from some other weapon in the section. If this is not possible, the
matter must be reported to the platoon commander so that it can be
covered by another section or by mortars.
OBSOLETE
Plate 13-2. Fixed Lines
Obstacles
1337. The use of wire and other obstacles is always important. The
allocation of these items and the priority given to them will be decided by
the company commander. Guidance in the siting, construction and
maintenance of field defences and the employment, design and
construction of obstacles if provided in MLW Two, Engr Trg 2.2, Obstacles
and Field Defences.
AL1
13–11
SECTION 13-3. PLANNING AND OCCUPYING THE
POSITION
Battle Procedure
1338. Warning Orders. The platoon commander will issue a warning
order to his platoon sergeant and section commanders either after
receiving his orders, or after receiving a warning order from the company
commander. The requirement for warning orders is described in Section
9-3. After issuing the warning order and before leaving for the company
OGp or reconnaissance, the platoon commander will entrust the continued
preparation and preliminary moves to the platoon sergeant. Section
commanders will extract the information relevant to their sections and
issue warning orders.
1339. Company Orders. Before commencing his detailed
reconnaissance the platoon commander will receive orders from the
company commander which will include the following information:
a. The Enemy. When and from which direction and in which form
the attack is most likely to come.
b. Own Troops. The locations of neighbouring platoons, whether
OBSOLETE
troops are out in front to cover the occupation of the position.
c. Task. Including the ground which the platoon must hold, ob-
serve and/or cover with fire, and its forward limits.
d. Support Weapons. Position and task of support weapons in the
platoon locality.
e. DF Tasks Near the Locality. Details of plans for DF tasks which
may be tentative at this stage.
f. Anti-armour Plan. Siting of anti-armour weapons, develop-
ment of construction of any tank obstacles and killing grounds.
g. Digging and Wiring. What digging and wiring is to be done and
the priority of work.
h. Times. By what time must the position be occupied and de-
fended; timings for defensive routine such as stand to and stand
down.
i. Patrols. Those patrols for which the platoon is responsible or
which are being sent out in the vicinity of the platoon, and their
routes and times out and in.
13–12
j. Tools and Stores. Details of the allocation of tools and defence

store, where and when they can be drawn.
k. Overhead Protection Material. Source of overhead protection
material.
l. Company Headquarters and CAP. Details of the location of
company headquarters and CAP.
m. Routes. Details of routes to company and battalion headquar-
ters, and to adjoining platoons and companies.
1340. Reconnaissance. After receiving his orders for the impending
operation, the platoon commander starts his detailed reconnaissance. The
reconnaissance must be planned (Section 9-4) so that the information
required can be obtained in the time available. During the reconnaissance
the platoon commander will conduct a combat appreciation (Section 9-5)
from which he will arrive at a plan for the defence of the ground which his
platoon has been tasked to defend.
1341. During the reconnaissance, the platoon commander will study his
area from his own and, if possible, from the enemy's point of view, noting
OBSOLETE
likely approaches and the fire positions which best cover them. The
platoon commander must check proposed weapon sites at ground level to
ensure that they can adequately cover these approaches. He must decide
how he can conceal his position from ground and air observation.
1342. He should visit neighbouring platoons and any supporting weapon
detachments or tanks in the area so that he knows exactly where they are.
During this period he will probably be visited by the company commander
who will discuss on the ground the section tasks, inter-platoon boundaries,
the line of forward fire trenches, and adjustments of DF tasks.
1343. In his appreciation, the company commander will determine the
locations of sections by identifying detailed tasks for the section MGs. In
his orders the company commander will detail specific tasks for each
platoon and allow the platoon commander to site section MGs to achieve
these tasks. The company commander should personally check MGs.
1344. Platoon Orders. Once the orders have been prepared the platoon
commander calls his OGp and gives his orders for the occupation of the
position. At this stage he may not have sufficient information to give
detailed orders, so in order to get work started on the platoon locality as
soon as possible, he may give preliminary orders. These include:
a. brief information on enemy and friendly forces,
13–13
b. the mission,
c. section positions and fire tasks (to include MG sites),
d. priority of work (this is given to him by the company com-
mander),
e. the track plan,
f. security provisions, and
g. location of platoon and company headquarters.
1345. Detailed orders will be given as soon as possible and should follow
the standard headings given in MLW Two, Inf Trg 2.2, Infantry
Commanders Aide-Memoire.
Occupation
1346. What the Section Commander Must Do. After receiving his
preliminary orders, the section commander carries out a detailed
reconnaissance of his own area. Having been given the site and tasks for
his MG, he select the sites for the remaining section weapons, and decides
OBSOLETE
on their arcs of fire, with primary and secondary tasks to carry out the
section tasks. He should make contact with neighbouring section posts so
that they know each other's positions, and can ensure that all the enemy
approaches are covered by fire. Finally, he marks out his fire trenches on
the ground as shown in Figure 13-1. The basic considerations are:
a. The MG is sited to cover the main tasks allotted and may be in
any one of the section's trenches.
b. The distance between trenches depends on visibility and voice
range.
c. Where there is an odd number of men in the section, one trench
must be adapted to accommodate three men.
d. Trenches in depth may be sited to fire between or over the heads
of forward trenches.
1347. The sections must be given their dispositions and fire tasks before
digging starts so that they can deal with any immediate enemy attack.
1348. When preparing a position while in contact with the enemy, each
man must, as soon as his weapon has been sited, provide himself with
some form of cover from which he can fire.
13–14
1349. The section commander is responsible for ensuring that:
a. the section weapons are so placed that each man can fire over
the arc allotted to him. The fire trenches must be selected with
the eye close to the ground. Each man's fire position must be
checked during construction and on completion;
b. each soldier understands his arcs, tasks and limits of fire. This
includes areas to his rear;
c. the section is not surprised by the enemy;
d. the section is dug in properly;
e. the section is concealed from ground and air observations, and
camouflage instructions are observed;
f. a proper routine is observed;
g. a range card is made for each pit and the men are briefed on all
reference points. The platoon commander should coordinate
the reference points;
OBSOLETE
h. strict attention is paid to track discipline;
i. dead ground is covered by fire from another section or by mor-
tars;
j. alternative arcs and possible alternative positions are selected,
if these have not been given by the platoon commander;
k. sentries are always posted on the MG and double sentries at
night;
l. troops who are not on duty sleep clothed and ready for instant
action;
m. no lights are shown;
n. personal weapons are kept alongside the soldier while he is
sleeping and within reach when he is working, and personal
equipment is kept packed and handy; and
o. there is minimum noise in the position.
1350. While the section commanders are conducting their reconnaissance
and the troops move onto the position, the platoon commander visits the
section commanders, coordinates tasks and coordinates the fire plan of the
platoon.
13–15
SECTION 13-4. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENCE
Routine
1351. It is difficult to specify times for routines except for 'stand to' and
'stand down'. Any routine details such as meal timings, erection of
shelters, water replenishment, etc will be governed by such factors as the
tactical situation, closeness of the country, degree of darkness and enemy
proximity and habits. It is important that a daily routine be established to
ensure a high standard of efficiency. Enemy air superiority or the
operational situation in general may dictate that units rest during the day
and operate at night. The following routine may be used as a guide;
a. Morning:
(1) strike shelters
(2) 'stand to'. The duration of stand to will vary according to
the season and the country but will be for a specific time
before and after first and last light respectively. Each
member puts on his fighting equipment, occupies his fire
position and mans his weapon. Clearing patrols may be
sent out during this period and 'stand down'should not be
ordered until their tasks are completed. LPs are reposi-
OBSOLETE
tioned and manned for day observation, and sentries are
posted. Troops 'stand down' on a specific order, not on a
time basis.
(3) check communications;
(4) reposition LPs and man them for day observation;
(5) check sensor devices, Anti-personnel weapon M18A1
(Claymore) and obstacles;
(6) change to day routine. Single sentries are posted, track
discipline is maintained;
(7) clean weapons and ammunition. Weapons should not all
be cleaned simultaneously. The cleaning of MGs must be
coordinate by the platoon commander or platoon ser-
geant. Defects and deficiencies should be reported. Sub-
ject to security restrictions, MGs should be test fired on a
regular basis but not from the MG pit;
(8) inspect all weapons and ammunition;
(9) troops shave, wash, clean boots, and periodic skin and foot
inspections are carried out;
(10) water bottles are filled and sterilised;
AL1
13–16
(11) breakfast may be cooked centrally and delivered to the po-
sition under section arrangements, or by pairs. Utensils
are cleaned and stored;
(12) take malaria suppressant;
(13) the section area is cleaned and equipment laid out for in-
stant use and camouflaged;
(14) clothing and equipment are checked and mended, and
boots are inspected.
(15) the section is briefed on the day's activities, patrol require-
ments, rehearsals, reconnaissance and rosters. Rest and
fatigues are organised and promulgated.
(16) further section activities such as reconnaissance patrols,
rehearsals and briefings are carried out. Improvement to
fire trenches, camouflage and wiring will be carried out as
necessary. Maximum possible uninterrupted rest should
be given to patrol members and all others except sentries;
and
(17) midday meal consumed.
OBSOLETE
b. Afternoon:
(1) re-clean weapons, check patrol equipment, radio webbing
carriers, batteries and ammunition.
(2) periodically check personal hygiene, re-applying powder,
repellent and anti-mite as required, conduct foot and skin
inspections.
(3) complete night preparations. Shelters are prepared but
normally not erected until after stand down, water is re-
plenished etc:
(4) evening meal eaten:
(5) orders for the night are issued. Ensure everyone knows
fields of fire, details of DF tasks, LPs and returning pa-
trols;
(6) LPs are repositioned and increased to at least two men.
Dusk will govern the time the platoon and company or-
ders require LPs to be in position. In close country LPS are
normally deployed and relieved in daylight and in open
country in darkness;
(7) check sensor devices and Anti-personnel weapon M18A1
(Claymore);
AL1
13–17
(8) all members ‘stand to', wearing fighting equipment and
man their fire positions until ordered to ‘ stand down'. Day
sentries are withdrawn. Clearing patrols may be sent out
during the evening ‘'stand to'. 'Stand down' should not be
ordered until their tasks are completed:
(9) change over from day to night routine; and
(10) equipment should be placed so that it is readily available
for use after dark.
c. Night:
(1) ‘stand down' on the company commander's orders;
(2) double sentries remain posted in the MG pit; and
(3) no movement after dark within the perimeter except by
patrols and for routine post changes. Track discipline
must be maintained.
Security
1352. Sentry Posts. Sentry posts are established forward or to a flank of
a platoon locality for the purpose of listening for enemy movement by day.
Their function is to provide early warning and passive security and they
OBSOLETE
should not open fire on the enemy. Their location and strength is ordered
by the platoon commander. At night forward sentries will be withdrawn
and tow sentries will be placed on the section MG. Troops positioned as
sentries must be fully briefed on their task and have communications with
their platoon, eg by vine, cord or, in protracted defence, perhaps by
telephone. Further details on sentries and sentry orders are contained in
Section 8-3.
1353. LPs. LPs are ordered by company commanders. They will
normally be sited within company weapon range to provide warning of
enemy infiltration or reconnaissance. Like sentry posts, they are
established to give early warning and would not normally open fire on an
enemy.
1354. Standing Patrols. Standing patrols are sited by the battalion
commander. Standing patrols are usually at least a section in strength
and dug in, and apart from providing early warning are prepared to
remain in position and fight. Information concerning their employment is
contained in MLW Two, Inf Trg 3.3, Patrolling and Tracking.
Clearing Patrols
1355. In close country it is necessary to use clearing patrols to ensure that
small parties of enemy are not lying up undetected, close to the defended
locality or to areas selected for temporary occupation eg platoon overnight
13–18
harbours. These patrols normally are used before last light and again after
first light. Their timing and route must not be allowed to become a matter
of routine. They may either be mounted on a company basis, using a depth
platoon or mounted by each platoon using a depth section or soldiers from
depth pits.
1356. If mounted by the company, the strength of a clearing patrol will
usually be about a section. If mounted by a platoon it will rarely be this
large but should never be less than two or three men. Depending on
enemy activity and the surrounding terrain a larger patrol may be
necessary. A single clearing patrol normally goes out from one point of the
forward edge of the locality, completes a circuit of the locality and returns
at approximately the same place. The distance it moves outside the
defence will depend on the visibility and the enemy habits.
1357. Alternatively a number of patrols may leave the position and clear
a part of the platoon/company front. In this case the patrols leave at the
same time, departing through a neighbouring section/platoon, move in the
same direction, that is anti-clockwise as for harbour drill clearing patrols,
then return through their own section/platoon. The platoon/company
remains at ‘stand to’ until all patrols are in.
OBSOLETE
Carriage of Weapon
1358. Whenever soldiers move around the position they must carry their
personal weapon with them. If the No 1 on the MG has to leave the area of
the MG he must carry the weapon of the sentry doing duty on the gun.
When soldiers are working in the position then personal weapons and
equipment must be within immediate reach. If weapons are placed on the
ground or against personal equipment they should be positioned so that
the safety catch is uppermost. In this manner the possibility of
unauthorised discharge is minimised.
Conduct Under Attack
1359. Types of Attack. The defence may be subjected to quick or
deliberate attack by day or night:
a. The Quick Attack. A quick attack is mounted with little warn-
ing and possibly while sentries and LPs are still in position.
b. The Deliberate Attack. A deliberate attack will probably be
launched after the approaches have been cleared of patrols, LPs
and sentries.
13–19
1360. Where noise is the only indication that the enemy may be in the
vicinity, the information is passed quickly to the higher commander. On
no account should indiscriminate firing be directed at such noises. Many
noises such as the rooting of the wild pigs and other animal noises may
lead inexperienced troops to raise an alarm unnecessarily and provide the
enemy with useful information. MGs may only be fired on the orders of
section or platoon commanders. Troops must realise that they are in a
much stronger position than any enemy moving above ground, and must
hold their fire.
1361. The difference between the two types of attack lies in the amount of
firepower the enemy has time to concentrate and use. In the quick attack
the enemy exploits surprise, and some of the platoon may be away from
their posts, carrying water and ammunition, patrolling or on other tasks.
At all times the MGs will be manned. When the alarm is given, all
members ‘stand’ to in their fire trenches and await orders. In the
deliberate attack, although the defenders may not anticipate its exact
direction or strength, warning will have been given by the enemy’s actions
and on the company commander’s orders the platoon ‘stands to’ and
prepares to meet the attack.
OBSOLETE
1362. Where our defences have been located, the enemy normally
supports his attack with all available firepower. As long as this fire
continues it will be very difficult to get soldiers to continue to expose
themselves. Commanders must set the example. The problem for the
platoon and section commander is to judge the time when the enemy
supporting fire will lift so that they can get ready to meet the assaulting
enemy troops. The enemy realises this and may resort to such deceptions
as switching fire to a flank to clear the frontage for his own troops.
Commanders must be on the alert to judge any breaks in the pattern of
fire.
1363. The platoon or section must fight as a team. How the battle is
fought will depend on such factors as whether or not tanks or APCs are in
the position, location of support company weapons, or whether or not the
platoon is by itself or in a company or battalion position. The speed with
which the enemy’s assault waves are engaged, depends largely on reflex
action by the members of the platoon and the good habits acquired in
training. The enemy is usually within range of accurate aimed fire for
such a short period of time that each man must instinctively engage when
the section commander calls for fire. Each shot must be aimed to kill. A
sudden volley of fire is more likely to disrupt the enemy assault than
scattered firing.
13–20
1364. The first rush will either fail or the enemy will be in amongst the
front fire trenches. If the rush fails, the enemy may resort to fire and
movement from a short range or organise more waves. In these cases the
section commander must counter the enemy fire and movement by
skilfully controlling the fire of his groups. These groups, if unable to fire
flat trajectory weapons, use grenades. The section commander must be
prepared to move men in the communication trenches to throw grenades
into lost fire trenches and to retake them by encouraging initiative and
immediate aggressive action. The section commander must impress on his
men that once the enemy’s first rush is beaten, or held, the initiative goes
to the defenders as they are in prepared fire trenches and know the front in
detail.
1365. The platoon commander must keep his company commander
informed of the situation in his locality and ask for DF tasks to be fired as
required.
Attack by Night
1366. The enemy will often launch deliberate attacks by night, as
darkness gives protection against aimed fire and assists surprise. The
inability to see the enemy will lead to increased fear which may influence
OBSOLETE
the effectiveness of the platoon. This fear can be overcome by night
training. Platoon and section commanders must maintain tight control
over fire and the use of illumination, and they must maximise the use of
every passive method available for observing the enemy.
1367. Surveillance Devices. Surveillance devices can be used to
monitor and observe movement without the inherent disadvantages of
illumination, but it must be remembered that they do not replace patrols,
and they are subject to technical failure and enemy efforts to neutralise
their value. The use of surveillance devices will allow the platoon and
section commanders to bring effective fire to bear on the enemy when they
are most vulnerable. The sensible use of surveillance devices will also
ensure that the initiative remains with the defenders.
1368. Illumination. The use of illumination must not be used until the
enemy is within the effective range of our small arms. Once initiated,
illumination should be continuous until the attack has been repulsed, as
the use of illumination will impair the night vision of the defenders. If
isolated illumination is used in exceptional circumstances, the soldiers
must be warned so that they can close one eye to reduce the loss of night
vision.
13–21
Local Counter-attack
1369. When under attack the task of the platoon is to hold its locality
intact. The task of the section is to hold its section post and to kill the
attacking enemy. The platoon may also be required to take part in a more
deliberate company counter-attack on another locality.
1370. If the attack has been contained the platoon commander may take
the initiative and order a section attack to retake lost fire trenches.
SECTION 13-5. RELIEF IN PLACE

General
1371. The relief of one platoon or company by another is a common
operation in defence. It usually takes place at night except in close country
when daylight relief has advantages. To avoid confusion it is essential that
there is a simple and deliberate procedure in which all ranks have been
thoroughly trained. The relief must be preceded by a reconnaissance
which will usually be the responsibility of an advance party from the
relieving body. To describe more fully the procedures which a platoon may
follow, relief in place is discussed in a battalion setting.
OBSOLETE
Advance Party
1372. The composition of the advance party depends on whether the
sub-units are in contact with the enemy, the time available, the amount of
preparation required and the vulnerability of the route forward. Either
the company commander and platoon commanders, or the company 2IC
and the platoon sergeants, go forward in the advance party to meet their
opposite numbers in the outgoing sub-unit and collect information. In
either case one guide per platoon accompanies them. The outgoing unit
usually provides patrols during the relief.
Information Required
1373. The incoming platoon requires information on:
a. the tasks of the platoon;
b. topography, including details of dead ground;
c. the enemy (habits, snipers, patrols, locations, minefields, wire,
shelling);
d. the disposition of platoons on flanks;
e. the complete layout of the platoon including the number of men
in each post, obstacles, warning devices, sniper posts, support
weapons locations, supporting arms OPs, and communications;
13–22
f. DF tasks and methods for calling for them;

g. alternative positions;
h. patrol routes and minefield lanes;
i. any stores to be taken over, such as ammunition or defence
stores;
j. feeding and sanitary arrangements;
k. evacuation of casualties;
l. the location of headquarters and aid posts;
m. routes for runners and track discipline; and
n. action during relief if there is an attack or shelling.
Preparation
1374. If the platoon sergeant goes with the advance party the relieving
platoon commander must:
a. brief the platoon sergeant and ensure that he has a written list
OBSOLETE
of all the information required;
b. inspect weapons, clothing and equipment for serviceability;
c. brief the platoon on:
(1) exactly what is going to happen;
(2) expected light and weather conditions;
(3) the need for silent movement;
(4) the actions to be taken if they are attacked whilst the oper-
ation is in progress;
(5) the acceptance of night battle noises as normal; and
(6) control measures coordinating the move forward.
Platoon Representative in the Advance Party
1375. The platoon representative will:
a. decide whether the digging of any extra fire trenches is neces-
sary before the relief takes place and, if so, arrange for a digging
party;
b. ensure that he knows where the company headquarters is and,
if necessary, takes the compass bearings and paces the distance
from platoon headquarters so that it can be found at night;
13–23
c. check range cards and sketches and make any extra copies re-
quired; and
d. site all weapons and allocate individuals to fire trenches.
Sequence of Relief
1376. The relief in place progresses as follows:
a. At the battalion checkpoint:
(1) companies are checked as they arrive, and
(2) guides lead companies direct to their company check-
points.
b. At the company checkpoint:
(1) platoon representatives meet their platoons and lead
them to their new localities; and
(2) the routes from the battalion checkpoint to the company
checkpoints are generally lit or marked by the outgoing
unit. In difficult places tape should be used. It is often nec-
essary to mark the way from the new company headquar-
OBSOLETE
ters to the new platoon headquarters.
c. When a platoon arrives in the area allotted to it, guides from the
outgoing sections meet and guide the incoming sections to their
positions. The incoming platoon representative briefs the
guides on:
(1) the name of the incoming section commander, and
(2) the strength of the section.
d. The incoming sections take up positions under cover as close as
possible to the fire trenches which they are to occupy. The out-
going sections will be ‘standing to’.
e. The actual handover is supervised by the incoming platoon rep-
resentative and conducted section by section.
f. Men are given their tasks and all relevant information possible,
including information about patrols. As they take over a fire
trench the men ‘stand to’ until ordered to ‘stand down’.
g. When sections are in position and all stores have been checked,
the platoon commander reports that the relief is complete to
company headquarters and when ordered to do so by the com-
pany commander stands the platoon down.
13–24
Passage of Command
1377. The outgoing officer or NCO is responsible for the defence of his
area until command passes. The moment when command is to pass is
determined by agreement between the two officers or NCOs unless decided
by higher headquarters. The decision as to when the command actually
passes over is a result of completed events, not time, and must be clearly
stated in orders. Before command passes, the outgoing commander
exercises full operational command over all subordinate elements of the
relieving force which have completed their portion of the relief. When
command passes, the relieving commander assumes full operational
command of all elements of the outgoing force which have not yet been
relieved.
1378. As soon as possible after the relief, the platoon and section
commanders must check their locality and posts to ensure that they are
the most suitable. The outgoing platoon positions must be studied
thoroughly in daylight, and improvements made accordingly.
OBSOLETE
14–1
CHAPTER 14
WITHDRAWAL
Introduction
1401. The aim of the withdrawal is to achieve a clean break from the
enemy, thereby providing an opportunity to regroup before resuming the
offensive. It may be conducted deliberately as part of a prearranged, plan
or more astily as a result of a change in the local tactical situation, such as
withdrawal under fire from a superior force encountered during patrols, or
after an ambush. The considerations and methods remain the same, but
the time available for planning and battle procedure varies.
1402. The withdrawal may become necessary:
a. as a result of local defeat,
b. to avoid battle under unfavourable operational or logistic condi-
tions,
c. to conform with the movements of friendly forces,
OBSOLETE
d. to draw the enemy into an unfavourable situation, or
e. to gain time.
1403. The platoon will usually withdraw as part of a larger force,
generally of battalion size. Much of the appreciation and planning will be
undertaken at battalion level or higher and the platoon will generally be
required to conform to a simple but well controlled plan. The withdrawal is
a difficult operation, often conducted at night and sometimes with
unexpected contact, so the platoon must be well disciplined and rehearsed.
1404. Platoon and section commanders should be familiar with the
withdrawal operation up to battalion level as described in Chapter 12 of
MLW Two, Inf Trg 1.1, The Infantry Battalion.
Considerations
1405. Platoon and section commanders must understand the basic
considerations of the withdrawal so that they can contribute to the
successful execution of the withdrawal plan and react correctly to
contingent circumstances. A successful withdrawal depends on the
following:
a. Simplicity and Flexibility. The withdrawal is a difficult opera-
tion, especially if there is contact with the enemy during the op-
eration. Good control is essential and can be achieved by a
14–2
simple flexible plan, clear orders, good communications and a
system of checkpoints and RV. Enemy interference must be an-
ticipated and the plan made to ensure the withdrawal contin-
ues in an orderly, secure manner.
b. Surprise. It is difficult to withdraw without sustaining heavy
casualties when the enemy knows exactly when it will occur.
Platoon activity must give no indication that a withdrawal is
imminent. The activity from the platoon should remain con-
stant until the last moment. Much of the planning and prelimi-
nary activity must be done under the cover of darkness.
Without surprise the withdrawing force will be hard-pressed to
achieve a clean break. The aim is to disengage from the enemy
and move back to the new position with the minimum of inter-
ference and casualties.
c. Security. If the enemy learns of or suspects a withdrawal he will
attempt to interfere with the operation and try to turn it into a
rout. Infiltration, penetration, ambush, and flank and rear at-
tacks are great dangers to the withdrawing platoon. The pla-
toon must maintain its front intact until the time of the
withdrawal, then withdraw quickly and without indicating
where it went. The platoon should RV as soon as possible and
move in a platoon formation that will provide as much security
OBSOLETE
as the time limitations will allow. When halted, the platoon
must adopt a defensive posture and should spend as little time
as possible at places such as RVs or bounds. If all else fails the
platoon and sections must be prepared to fight their way out.
The last sub-unit to withdraw may be given vehicles for in-
creased mobility.
d. Offensive Action. While the withdrawal is essentially move-
ment away from the enemy, there will be opportunities for the
platoon to undertake offensive action. Aggressive patrolling
and ambushing will help achieve surprise, security and a clean
break. Activities by rear parties such as anti-tankmining, will
assist the withdrawal and inflict casualties on the enemy. Am-
bushes may also be set to slow down the following enemy.
e. Maintenance of Morale. The withdrawal imposes a greater
strain on the morale of troops than most other operations. Pla-
toon and section commanders must act to ensure that the stan-
dard of morale within the platoon does not deteriorate. Once the
withdrawal has begun, a s much reliable information as be-
comes available must be passed quickly through the chain of
command to counteract rumours.
AL1
14–3
Stages
1406. At platoon level, the withdrawal can be considered in three stages:
a. planning and preparation,
b. conduct, and
c. occupation of the new defensive position.
SECTION 14-2. PLANNING AND PREPARATION
What the Platoon Commander Must Know
1407. Before the withdrawal the platoon commander of a forward platoon
must have the following information:
a. Enemy strengths, locations and possible intentions.
b. Withdrawal plans of any covering troops, ie those forward and
to the flank of his position.
c. Who is to order his withdrawal and by what means.
d. What the company's commitment is to rear parties.
OBSOLETE
e. Timings, including:
(1) the time before which there is to be no rearward move-
ment. This time primarily involves movement of unneces-
sary stores, equipment and personnel which will move
before the main body of troops. No movement is to be
taken before this time, except for rear reconnaissance par-
ties.
(2) The time until which the position is to be denied to the en-
emy. Until this time, sufficient troops must remain on the
position to maintain the integrity of the defence to ensure
the enemy can be repelled.
(3) The time by which the position must be abandoned, or the
time that all troops must be clear of a line to the rear of the
position. This will allow the commander freedom of action
to use his supporting artillery and/or air support forward
of the line.
f. The location of the platoon RV.
g. The location and route to the company RV, and check point. The
route must not mask the fire of troops holding a position in the
rear.
h. The position of troops through whom he has to or may have to
withdraw.
14–4
i. The location of the position to which he has to withdraw and any

intermediate positions.
j. The location of the battalion RV and mounting point.
k. Which platoon will be last out and its tasks, eg:
(1) to delay enemy by fire and movement, or
(2) to lay ambushes on the withdrawal route.
l. The requirement to lay mines in the platoon area and the in-
structions for closing of mine lanes.
m. Details of available supporting fire.
n. Administrative arrangements including:
(1) the ammunition to be carried,
(2) the disposal of excess stores and equipment
(3) arrangements for casualty evacuation, and
(4) feeding arrangements.
Effects of Topography and Meteorology
OBSOLETE
1408. When deciding on the order of withdrawal of his sections, the
platoon commander must consider the effects of ground and darkness. The
following procedures are recommended:
a. In Open Country by Night. The rear platoons of companies and
the rear sections of forward platoons are usually withdrawn
first so that an intact front can be maintained until the last mo-
ment. The forward troops will then quickly move back unre-
stricted by those previously behind. This should effect a clean
break. It is vital, however, that the enemy does not penetrate
this remaining line or discover that the position lacks depth.
b. In Open Country by Day. It is very difficult to achieve a clean
break without good mobility and the ability to conceal your in-
tentions. Alarge amount of firepower, particularly air and artil-
lery, would be required. Since the withdrawal is likely to be
observed and attract an enemy response, the forward sections
usually withdraw first using the rear sections to cover them. If
necessary, sections will leapfrog using fire and movement.
Without compensating mobility and firepower a withdrawal in
open country is best conducted at night.
c. In Close Country by Day. In close country withdrawals are eas-
ier by day as the enemy air and ground observation will be re-
stricted. It should be possible to withdraw rear sections first
14–5
without compromising secrecy and the intact front. However,
the enemy is able to attack from a closer distance and is more
likely to penetrate the defensive position or the withdrawal
route. If in contact or a contact is imminent, the forward sec-
tions may have to be leapfrogged through the rear sections.
d. In Close Country by Night. There is a great risk of losing control
of sections and individuals when withdrawals in close country
are attempted at night. There is also a risk of infiltration and
ambush. If such a withdrawal is unavoidable, success will be
greatly dependent on the individual and collective training of
the platoon in night operations; and on the simplicity of the
plan, the clarity of orders, a detailed preparatory reconnais-
sance and identification of routes.
Control
1409. To ensure that the withdrawal of one sub-unit does not mask that
of another, and to avoid clashes with own troops, commanders must know
the location of their sub-unit RVs and the routes from these RVs to the unit
RV. The company commander will select the platoon RV and the platoon
commander will select the section RV. At section level these will generally
OBSOLETE
be immediately behind the section position. At platoon level, the RV should
be an easily recognisable place with cover from aimed enemy small-arms
fire and observation. The platoon RV should allow the earliest possible
concentration of the platoon.
1410. For control purposes the section and platoon commanders will
choose a checkpoint on the routes to their respective RVs. To assist in
control, platoon and section commanders should reconnoitre and
memorise the route back to the company RV. The section 2IC should also
reconnoitre and memorise the route to the platoon RV. The platoon
sergeant will not usually be present during the withdrawal but will be at
the new defensive position with the rear reconnaissance party. Control
measures are shown in Figure 14- 1.
Orders
1411. Platoon orders should include most of the information required by
the platoon commander in (paragraph 1407 ) and the soldiers must be fully
briefed in case the platoon or section commander becomes a casualty.
14–6
Rear Parties
Coy Check Rear

Pt Party RV
and
Embussing
Coy RV Pt Coy RV
Coy RV Coy RV
OBSOLETE Bn Check Pt
Bn RV
Bn Mounting/Emplaning Area
Figure 14-1. Control Measures in the Withdrawal
Administration
1412. Before the withdrawal commences, platoon and section
commanders must ensure that:
a. surplus stores, equipment and ammunition have been dis-
posed of as ordered;
14–7
b. the remaining equipment and weapons are complete and ready

for immediate use;
c. casualties or those with injuries likely to slow the withdrawal
have been sent back;
d. each section has a stretcher or means of transporting casual-
ties; and
e. nothing of use to the enemy is left behind. This includes:
(1) intelligence, such as old orders, notes and letters;
(2) stores, equipment, ammunition; and
(3) weapons.
SECTION 14-3. CONDUCT
1413. Just before the designated time of movement, troops should be
wearing only the equipment needed for the withdrawal. This will ensure
that their fighting ability is not impeded and that they will be able to move
quickly and silently.
1414. The section will withdraw as a whole and move to its position in the
platoon RV. The first section to arrive at the platoon RV is responsible for
OBSOLETE
its security. If a section has to withdraw in contact it does so by fire and
movement. The following points apply:
a. The section commander withdraws with the last group after
checking that all the other members of the section are clear of
the position.
b. The section commander maintains control of his section by
voice or by other means which have been rehearsed by the sec-
tion and can be employed in the worst case of close country by
night.
c. Fire control must be maintained.
d. Casualties are carried on the section stretchers and will be dealt
with in accordance with the casualty evacuation plan.
e. On arrival at the platoon RV, section commanders check their
sections and report to the platoon commander.
1415. The platoon commander withdraws with the last section after
ensuring that all sections have withdrawn from the position. To assist him
in this matter he may establish a checkpoint at the rear of the platoon
position or just before the platoon RV. A prepositioned guide can then
inform him of the sections withdrawn as he moves through with the last
section. At the platoon RV the platoon commander receives reports from
the section commanders, arranges casualty evacuation and moves the
platoon to the company RV through the company check point.
14–8
1416. If the withdrawal is a fighting withdrawal, the platoon commander
may have to fire and move his sections not only back to the platoon RV, but
back to the company RV. He must make the maximum use of supporting
fire, especially mortar and artillery, to achieve a clean break.
1417. On arrival at the company RV, the platoon occupies a prearranged
locality in all-round defence and the platoon commander reports to the
company commander. The company will then move rearwards as ordered.
1418. The pace for the withdrawal is a fast walk except when there is a
need for fire and movement. Anything above a fast walk is fatiguing,
induces panic and makes control difficult, especially at night. Fast and
deliberate movement avoids confusion, inspires confidence and assists in
achieving a clean break.
1419. Where vehicles are used to assist in the withdrawal the platoon will
withdraw to an embussing point or marrying-up area. This area may be at
the platoon RV when A vehicles are used, providing that their positioning
does not prejudice surprise and security, and that the anti-armour threat
is acceptable. The embussing point or marrying-up area could be at or near
the battalion RV.
OBSOLETE
SECTION 14-4. OCCUPATION OF THE NEW DEFENSIVE
POSITION
1420. The new defensive position should be reconnoitred before the old
one is evacuated. The group that carries out this task is the rear
reconnaissance party. Usually the platoon sergeant will go back under the
command of the company 2IC. The platoon sergeant will take one or more
members of the platoon to assist and act as guides.
1421. The new position is reconnoitred and orders are given as for the
defence. The company 2IC will issue defence orders and designate platoon
areas. Within this area the platoon sergeant will site all the fire trenches
and if time permits, and with the assistance of the guides, will:
a. define the fire trenches by spitlocking;
b. mark them with tape or paper, to assist in positioning troops in
the dark;
c. dig the machine gun pits to stage one; and
d. dig latrines.
1422. The platoon sergeant and guides receive the incoming platoon at a
point decided by the company 2IC and guide the sections into position. The
routine then continues as for the occupation and conduct of defence.
15–1
PART FOUR – TRAINING

CHAPTER 15. TRAINING THE PLATOON
SECTION 15-1. CONDUCT OF TRAINING
General
1501. Soldiers in a rifle platoon will have varying levels of ability and
experience. The new platoon commander can identify these levels early if
he reads the existing platoon commander's notebook and consults his
platoon NCOs, the company commander and the CSM. These levels must
be taken into account when tasks are allocated in the platoon and the
training programme is prepared.
1502. Soldiers who have been in the platoon for some time will be aware
of battalion and company SOPs and will probably have set tasks within
the section and platoon. These more experienced soldiers can also be used
to assist in training less experienced soldiers and making them feel
welcome in the team. Care has to be taken to ensure that lessons contrary
to the training requirement are not taught.
OBSOLETE
1503. Soldiers who have completed their Initial Employment Training
(IET) or have arrived from an RHU may not possess all the skills required.
Commanders at all levels must be aware of the exit standards of IET
establishments and RHUs and ensure that their training programmes are
geared to provide for a smooth continuation in learning.
1504. The platoon commander must be aware of the requirements for
promotion and must examine the terminal performance standards for
promotion courses. The resultant identification of gaps in the new soldiers'
knowledge or skills should provide the platoon commander with part of the
basis of a training programme for all of his soldiers. Teaching soldiers to
the point where they can run a section and are potential NCOs should be
one of the platoon commander's primary goals.
The Programme
1505. The CO will detail the battalion training programme. It may take
the form of a training directive or training instructions to cover successive
phases. The directive, or training instructions, will normally be issued in
time to enable company commanders to plan and prepare their own
programmes. The company commander will either prepare a detailed
programme which dictates what will be taught and when, or he will
provide comprehensive guidelines for the platoon commanders to prepare
their own detailed programmes. In the latter case, he will indicate the
15–2
broad own detailed programmes. In the latter case, he will indicate the
broad subjects to be covered, the standards required and when the troops
will be assessed.
1506. The first step in preparing a detailed training programme is to
analyse the battalion or company training directive to determine the tasks
or activities that must be completed, and the dates by which these tasks or
activities must be completed by each platoon. Each of these tasks or
activities must then be further analysed to determine the individual and
group skills necessary to achieve them. The individual and group skills for
each task or activity should be listed and recorded for use in subsequent
years.
1507. The next step in preparing a training programme is to assess the
level of training of the soldiers. The platoon commander must learn which
of the individual and group skills identified in the analysis can be
performed by the soldiers and to what standard. This can be done, by a
series of tests, exercises or competitions.
1508. Once the level of training has been assessed, the platoon
commander can gauge where his platoon falls short of the training
requirement and he can plan his programme to cover those areas. The
structuring of the training will be influenced by the need to teach
OBSOLETE
individual skills before group skills (where the training is new) and by the
dates laid down for the platoon tasks or activities. (Reference to the
appropriate training management plan, collective and/or individual
training, would greatly assist in this task.)
1509. Even if a detailed programme is prepared by the company
commander, the platoon commander should assess the level of training of
his soldiers for his own information. If it becomes obvious that the platoon
is weak in some areas not previously recognised by the company
commander, the platoon commander should inform the company
commander so that time is allowed to rectify the problem. He may also find
that the platoon has to spend considerable time retraining on areas that
have been incorrectly taught or to eliminate bad habits. This may mean
that a planned programme has to be changed to accommodate extra
training on areas of weakness. The new platoon commander should
consult his platoon sergeant and the company commander when he
prepares the training programme.
Running the Programme
1510. The platoon commander should set goals, allocate the training
resources and then supervise the training. He should give most of the
instruction on platoon level knowledge and skills whereas the platoon
NCOs should carry most of the instructional burden on individual skills.
The platoon commander is responsible for the collective training of his
sections and section commanders. It is the section commander's
15–3
responsibility to ensure that each member of his section has the individual
skills required to enable him to successfully complete his job.
1511. There must be constant checking of faults by the platoon
commander, the platoon sergeant and the section NCOs. Every time a
soldier does something wrong or half-heartedly without correction it
becomes harder to fix the fault.
1512. The main difficulty is to keep training interesting. Realism adds
interest, builds team spirit and helps prepare troops for the realities of
battle. This does not mean that all the training is to be tactical. Short
tactical sessions may achieve more by allowing the soldier time to relax
and think over or discuss the lessons he has learnt.
1513. The platoon commander will find that repetition in training is
necessary. This does not mean that the same lesson is taught over and over
again until the soldiers know it by heart, or that able soldiers are forced to
endure repetitious training because less able soldiers fail to comprehend.
Only constant practice will ensure that the soldier can gain and maintain a
high proficiency in basic skills. The platoon commanders and those
assisting should make use of the training ideas and exercises contained in
the Infantry Training series of the Manual of Land Warfare.
General OBSOLETE
SECTION 15-2. NIGHT TRAINING
1514. Night operations will always be a feature of warfare; to achieve

surprise, to maintain the momentum of an operation, to keep pressure on
the enemy, to minimise the effect of enemy air power and to minimise
casualties. Modern night fighting equipment does not lessen the
requirement to train for night operations - it increases it. There is a need to
become familiar with the equipment and to understand how the enemy
uses it, enabling development of techniques to defeat or minimise the effect
of enemy equipments. The training of soldiers revolves around fieldcraft,
navigation, weapons handling and battlecraft. New equipments enhance
these capabilities, but do not replace them.
1515. Frequency. To acquire and maintain night operational skills
requires regular and extended night training periods. Once a week is the
recommended frequency. A few lessons of an introductory or procedural
nature, eg, theory of night vision, unit SOPs, may be conducted during the
to be conducted and once decided, this should not vary. The night should be
early in the week so that if a period has to be postponed, the next night will
be available to complete the training. Company and platoon commanders
should avoid interfering with the normal end of week social and
commercial commitments and take into account unit sports days. Regular
15–4
training conducted on set nights will fit into an accepted pattern for all
concerned, including soldiers' families.
1516. Duration. Initially night training should last for at least 2-3 hours,
in order to overcome the strangeness of the training and accustom soldiers
to working in the dark. This period should be extended as individual and
crew skills are mastered and collective skills are practised. As the soldiers
are already trained in most aspects of night operations, commanders can
expect to move onto collective skills very quickly. As new equipment and
procedures are learnt, individual, crew and collective training can be done
concurrently.
1517. As section, platoon and company night training becomes more the
norm, training times will lengthen. It is recommended that ‘reverse cycle'
training be used. This is a term used to describe training where most
traditional day and night activities are reversed, with troops operating at
night and resting by day. A reverse cycle exercise of a week's duration
(including four nights) would be a suitable way to end a particular block of
night training, eg advance, attack and pursuit. To make such training
exercise more timely and relevant, it should be programmed to be
completed just before a major battalion or brigade exercise which will test
OBSOLETE
the night training just completed.
Training Content
1518. Night training lessons and exercises should cover:
a. introductory training, such as unit SOPs, description of the
programme and overall aims;
b. individual skills, such as carriage of equipment, first aid and
physical training;
c. fieldcraft skills, such as night vision, identifying sounds, move-
ment at night and camouflage;
d. navigation skills (orienteering is an excellent training method);
e. weapon handling and shooting skills, including stripping and
assembling, cleaning, immediate action drills and range prac-
tices;
15–5
f. battlecraft skills, including all tactical techniques described in

this pamphlet with particular emphasis on those requiring de-
manding control measures such as advance to contact, the at-
tack, the withdrawal, challenging procedures, marrying-up
procedures with A and B vehicles, crossing obstacles and
breaching minefields;
g. equipment training, on section and platoon equipments, such
as the patrol ambush light (PAL), platoon early warning system
(PEWS), the trilux rifle sight, the individual weapon sight, and
other common equipments, such as radios (and their antennae)
and pyrotechnics;
h. two-sided exercises, which will train soldiers, acting as the en-
emy, to identify weaknesses in equipment. This aspect of train-
ing can be readily included in any exercise; and
i. specialist platoon skills, which are described in Section 15-3.
Many such skills and equipments are invaluable to the rifle pla-
toon. Night training in skills of particular significance include
target/grid procedure and illumination missions, operating pio-
neer equipments such as jackhammers, assault boats, mine de-
OBSOLETE
tectors, SFMG with C2 sights, and radio and line equipment
setting up, operation and repair.
1519. Once proficiency is achieved in company level night training, other
arms and services should be integrated into night training, with particular
attention to infantry/armour training, artillery training, military police
training (traffic control) and administrative training (resupply, vehicle
recovery and repair). All units which normally attach representatives to
infantry units and sub-units should train with the infantry during the
training periods and exercises mentioned above. These include artillery
FOs (and their parties), engineers, armoured LOs and others as required
such as drivers and cooks. This training is coordinated at company level.
Fatigue, Stress and Safety
1520. Fatigue. Soldiers cannot train or continue to function in battle by
both day and night for extended periods of time. Experience has shown
that, although many physical activities such as route marching, can
continue for 2 or 3 days or more, the decision making process of leaders and
others deteriorates markedly and soldiers' overall performance drops.
Physical training can build up stamina to minimise the effects of sleep loss.
If troops train by night, consideration must be given to daytime ‘stand
down', or ensuring that the type of training conducted during the following
day is suitable.
15–6
1521. Stress. In peacetime, training commanders at all levels should be
keenly aware of how individuals react under stress. Stress in training is
not a bad thing, providing it is applied in a sensible, safe manner. Trained,
confident soldiers seek ways of proving themselves and extended night
training periods are a way of placing stress on them. Commanders in
particular are subject to stress and should be aware of the resultant
degradation in their decision making ability. Battle inoculation is a proven
and effective method of creating stress in a training situation. The
combined effects of the `crack-thump' of the rounds and the knowledge
that the rounds are live, add to the realism of the training and should be
used wherever practicable.
1522. Safety. Safety requirements must always be met. When soldiers
become fatigued, care must be taken to ensure normal safety measures are
followed. This is especially important during night shoots or night field
firing exercises, or when troops are working with armour or helicopters, or
travelling in vehicles.
SECTION 15-3. ASSISTANCE FROM SPECIALIST PLATOONS
1523. All of the specialist platoons can assist with the training of the rifle
platoon. The platoon commander must be familiar with the roles and tasks
of the specialist platoons and call on their specialist knowledge to add
OBSOLETE
variety to the platoon training and to ensure that instruction is being
provided by those best qualified. Examples of the type of twining
assistance which can be provided by the specialist platoons are as follows:
a. Mortar Platoon:
(1) Target/grid procedure
(2) Adjust fire using the mini mortar range.
b. Assault Pioneer Platoon:
(1) Booby traps recognition
(2) Mine warfare
(3) Field defences
(4) Watermanship
(5) Employment of flamethrowers.
c. Anti-armour Platoon:
(1) SRAAW handling
(2) AFV recognition
(3) Introduction to MRAAW.
AL1
15–7
d. SFMG Platoon:
(1) Use of the tripod
(2) Theory of MG fire.
e. Signal Platoon:
(1) Platoon operators' course
(2) Laying wire
(3) Basic radio operator training for all members of the pla-
toon.
f. Medical Platoon:
(1) First aid training
(2) Health and hygiene instruction.
SECTION 15-4. UNSCHEDULED TRAINING
General
1524. Junior commanders should compile a list of short training exercises
and activities which can be used to reinforce formal training and make use
OBSOLETE
of spare time. Ideally the exercises/activities should be written on cards
and carried by the junior commander so that they can be used when the
opportunity arises. Some examples of these activities are as follows:
a. Tests of elementary training (TOETs) (particularly before or
during live firing activities).
b. Weapon deployment and sighting, eg Anti-personnel weapon
M18A1 (Claymore).
c. Fieldcraft and target detection:
(1) why things are seen,
(2) personal camouflage,
(3) judging distance,
(4) indicating targets,
(5) fire control orders,
(6) use of range cards,
(7) movement with arms,
(8) crossing obstacles,
(9) selection of lines of advance, and
(10) fire positions.
AL1
15–8
d. Patrolling and tracking:

(1) use of sign,
(2) deception,
(3) close reconnaissance,
(4) casualty evacuation,
(5) entering a patrol RV, and
(6) duties of a sentry.
e. Use of fire support:
(1) how to call for fire, and
(2) effects of fire.
f. Navigation:
(1) grid references,
(2) identifying locations on a map,
(3) finding grid references for features on the ground,
(4) taking bearings,
OBSOLETE
(5)
(6)
(7)
direction from the stars,
direction from the sun and a watch,
pacing,
(8) bypassing,
(9) traversing, and
(10) resection.
g. First aid:
(1) taking a pulse;
(2) clearing the airway;
(3) expired air resuscitation;
(4) carrying a casualty;
(5) treatment of wounds;
(6) treatment of burns;
(7) dressings, bandages, slings and splints; and
(8) treatment of heat exhaustion and heat stroke.
h. Section fire and movement procedures,
i. Procedures for contact drills,
15–9
j. Searching an area or a prisoner of war and

k. Twenty Questions. The junior leader prepares 20 cards with
questions each week. The questions can range from any of the
above topics to weapon ranges and characteristics.
1525. This list is by no means exhaustive. It is meant to be a guide to the
type of training that can be conducted in short 15-20 minute gaps in
organised training. Junior commanders should use a ‘vui tui' with a list of
headings and relevant facts on each subject to enable them to make the
most effective use of their time.
1526. An example of the type of notes required and the suggested
headings for a variety of subjects is at Annex A.
SECTION 15-5. COMPETITION IN TRAINING
General
1527. Competition in training (Annex B ) can be used to highlight
weaknesses in individual and group skills as well as to provide an
interesting change in instructional procedures for the soldiers involved.
Competition between individuals can be used to test and assess the
soldiers' basic skills Decision making processes and physical fitness.
OBSOLETE
Competition between groups can be used to test the teamwork and
battlecraft skills of the group in a number of physically and mentally
demanding activities.
1528. The competitions should be well organised and place high demands
on the soldiers involved and, where possible, make use of existing facilities.
These facilities can include ranges, obstacle and confidence courses, road
systems, training areas, etc. The organisation for the activity should
include:
a. booking any training facility required;
b. providing rules and a scoring system for the activity;
c. producing an outline of events and detailing safety officers,
where required;
d. providing activities for troops waiting to compete or who have
finished the exercise; and
e. arranging for administrative support.
Annexes: A. Examples of Training Notes
B. Competition Activities
15–10
OBSOLETE
15A–1
ANNEX A TO
CHAPTER 15
EXAMPLES OF TRAINING NOTES
a. Selection of Lines of Advance:
(1) observation,
(2) fire positions,
(3) cover from view and fire,
(4) obstacles, and
(5) basic drill for taking cover.
(6) Have half the troops camouflage themselves and move
about 100 m away from the remainder of the group who
should be facing away from the area. On a prearranged
signal have the group turn around and the camouflage
soldiers begin moving forward using fire and movement.
Have the observing group indicate targets as the group
moves. When the group gets close stop the exercise and
discuss the final positions of the group. Highlight any
points which came out of the exercise. (Further exercises
OBSOLETE
are contained in MLW Two, Inf Trg, Fieldcraft and Target
Detection).
b. Casualty evacuation:
(1) Discuss methods of casualty evacuation and how it is pro-
vided.
(2) Discuss battle wounds.
(3) Discuss improvised stretchers and methods of carrying a
casualty.
(4) Make an improvised stretcher.
(5) Discuss the need for the following when carrying a casu-
alty:
(a) early warning group, eg scouts;
(b) command group;
(c) carrying group; and
(d) protection group.
c. Fire support.
(1) Discuss the types of fire support available.
(2) Discuss the methods of calling for indirect fire support.
(3) Practise the group in calling for indirect fire.
15A–2
d. Identifying locations on a map.

(1) Revise how to give a grid reference.
(2) Revise how to read map to ground and identify features,
creeks etc on map.
(3) Indicate a feature on the ground and have soldiers indi-
cate it on the map and give a grid reference for it.
(4) Combine with practice in calling for indirect fire support
on the feature and normal target indication methods.
OBSOLETE
15B–1
ANNEX B TO
CHAPTER 15
COMPETITION ACTIVITIES
Exercises for Trained Soldiers
1. Select a number of stands, each the base for a separate exercise.
The exercises can include a selection from the following examples:
a. Run. The distance can be varied according to the circumstances
and the run can be included anywhere in the programme.
b. Obstacle Course or Confidence Course. Bayonets can be fitted
during this activity and bayonet dummies placed through the
course.
c. Carrying a Casualty. Involves the requirement to carry a casu-
alty and apply a shell dressing to a wound.
d. Crossing a river or similar obstacle.
e. Range practice. If conducted as a group activity then the prac-
tice should include all the weapons carried by the group; eg a
OBSOLETE
section.
f. Communications. Communications activities would include re-
quirements to:
(1) set up and transmit a message on the current in-service
radio, and
(2) carrying a verbal message through all activities and de-
liver at the end of the competition.
g. Strip and Assemble. Involving the stripping and assembling of
the in-service weapons used by the unit.
h. Enemy Encounters. Involving:
(1) meeting a lone enemy,
(2) encountering an enemy MG pit,
(3) contacting an enemy sniper, or
(4) encountering a wounded enemy soldier.
i. Observation and Deduction Lane. Information contained in the
lane can be either used during the rest of the competition or de-
livered to a debriefing officer at the end of the activity.
j. Breaching a Minefield.
15B–2
k. Friendly Troops and Civilians. Involving:

(1) encountering a lone friendly soldier,
(2) encountering a lone wounded friendly soldier,
(3) encountering a lone civilian, and
(4) searching a civilian.
l. Navigation Stand. Where any of the navigational activities
listed in paragraphs 15.24.f or Annex A to this chapter can be
used.
m. Medical stand, where any of the medical activities listed in
paragraphs 15.24.g or Annex A to this chapter can be used.
2. Points can be awarded for each successfully completed activity.
At the end of the competition the points are totalled and the winning
team announced.
3. If the competitors have to carry a message or provide informa-
tion at the end of the activity then the debriefing officer must have a
separate stand. The messages and information should be recorded so
that the whole group can be debriefed at the end of the activity.
4. A time factor can be added to any of the activities to make it
OBSOLETE
more competitive. Points should be deducted for going over time.
5. Training should also be arranged for those soldiers waiting to
compete or having completed the competition. This training could in-
clude any of the short lessons included in this chapter or a more formal
presentation, for example, using the mini-mortar range to instruct on
fire control.
Raids
6. Raiding parties can be made up and given missions to complete.
The missions could be:
a. to rescue a POW,
b. to destroy:
(1) an administrative area,
(2) a bridge,
(3) an enemy barracks,
(4) vehicles,
(5) a CP
(6) an ammunition dump,
(7) fuel dump,
(8) stores area, or
(9) an airfield.
15B–3
7. The success of the exercise depends largely on the need for se-
crecy, ensuring that the raiders do not discover the layout of the target
area, before their deployment in the field. The guards should be
briefed in the target area and the raiders should be briefed at drop
points some distance from the target.
8. Time should be allowed for movement to the target, close recon-
naissance, destruction of the target and extraction from the area. The
exercise can be conducted at night.
Infiltration, Escape and Close Reconnaissance Exercises
9. Infiltration, escape and close reconnaissance exercises can be
conducted competitively and still provide excellent reinforcement
training. These exercises should be run along the same lines as raids
and points awarded for a successful result. A lantern stalk, while ap-
pearing low key, is a good vehicle for this type of training.
Orienteering
10. Orienteering is an excellent way to reinforce physical fitness
and navigation training. Once the basic methods of orienteering are
mastered, orienteering can be combined with other activities, eg a
OBSOLETE
treasure hunt to add interest and competition to an already competi-
tive form of training. Details are contained in numerous books on the
subject and in MLW Two, Inf Trg 3.1, Navigation.
Range Practices
11. Basic fire and movement exercises can be conducted on classifi-
cation ranges provided that the restrictions imposed by MLW Two, Inf
Trg 8. 1, Range Instructions and Safety Precautions are observed. Dif-
ferent targets can be engaged and points can be awarded for the fol-
lowing:
a. hits on target,
b. control,
c. fire control, and
d. movement.
15B–4
12. These basic exercises can then be expanded into more complex
fire and movement training on field firing ranges. Basic training in
fire control in the section defence can be conducted in a similar man-
ner. A platoon field firing exercise in a tactical setting can combine and
test many battle skills and is an excellent way to culminate a stage of
training. Supporting weapons an equipments may be written into the
exercise. Examples of such platoon field firing exercises are:
a. an attack on a strong point,
b. an assault river crossing in assault boats,
c. a dismounted attack from APCs, and
d. ambushes, by day and night, both mobile and dug in.
13. Imaginative use of field firing ranges and mechanical target
equipment currently in service will greatly enhance the training of the
platoon.
OBSOLETE

MLW 2-1-2 The Rifle Platoon 1986 Full Obsolete 0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MLW 2-1-2 The Rifle Platoon 1986 Full Obsolete 0 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MLW 2-1-2 The Rifle Platoon 1986 Full Obsolete 0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the conditions of release for this document?

What are the conditions of release for this document?

What types of training activities are described in the document?

What types of training activities are described in the document?

TE 7610-66-125-4288

Notified in DI (ADMIN) 20 series for 1986

MANUAL OF LAND WARFARE

MANUAL OF LAND WARFARE

Headquarters Training Command

Authorised for issue.

2. When this information is supplied to Commonwealth or foreign gov-

a. be safeguarded under rules designed to give it the equiva-

Released to: ……………………………………………………………

Released by: ……………………………………………………………

Date Released: ……………………………………………………………

Australian Army Manual of Land Warfare, Part Two,

Doctrine Production, Force Development Group, Combined

Amendment List Amended By (Printed Date of Amending

1. 30/11/99 Doctrine Production 18/07/00

Australian Army (Less RA Inf) Scale C

2. This pamphlet is written for company, platoon and section com-

3. The pamphlet reflects the operation of the platoons with a standard

5. The pamphlet takes into account the doctrine contained in other

PART ONE. COMBAT POWER

CHAPTER 2 COMBAT SUPPORT

CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS

5-3 Resupply 507

PART TWO. BATTLECRAFT

CHAPTER 6 TACTICAL FORMATIONS AND CONTACT DRILLS

CHAPTER 7. CLOSING WITH THE ENEMY

7-2 Use of Covered/Concealed Approaches 703

CHAPTER 9. BATTLE PROCEDURE

Patrol and Ambush Orders 961

CHAPTER 10. NEGOTIATING OBSTACLES

PART THREE. TACTICS

CHAPTER 11. ADVANCE AND PURSUIT

11-3 Conduct of the Advance 1132

CHAPTER 12. ATTACK

12-7 Support for the Attack 1282

CHAPTER 13. DEFENCE

13-3 Planning and Occupying the Position 1338

15-2 Night Training 1514

10-1 Crossing at 800 mils Downstream 10-5

The following abbreviations are used in this publication. Their

Common Military Usage

PART ONE. COMBAT POWER

SECTION 1-1. GENERAL

`Combat Power - The total means of destructive and/or disruptive force

SECTION 1-2. ORGANISATION AND ROLE

SECTION 1-4. THE RIFLE PLATOON

c. encode and decode messages,

g. his section maintains its weapons, ammunition, clothing and

SECTION 1-5. WEAPONS AND EQUIPMENT

ORGANISATION OF THE STANDARD INFANTRY

Mor Anti Armd SFMG Aslt Pnr Sig

DETAILED ORGANISATION OF THE RIFLE COMPANY

DETAILED ORGANISATION OF THE RIFLE COMPANY

Rifle Pl Spt Sect

Offrs ORs Total Light Mdm GP SRAAW